2002-04-09 David S. Miller <davem@redhat.com>
[official-gcc.git] / gcc / config / sparc / sparc.c
blobf7c28a70dc15132d53555f4e0f55726b01a3cbe2
1 /* Subroutines for insn-output.c for Sun SPARC.
2 Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1989, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
3 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 Contributed by Michael Tiemann (tiemann@cygnus.com)
5 64 bit SPARC V9 support by Michael Tiemann, Jim Wilson, and Doug Evans,
6 at Cygnus Support.
8 This file is part of GNU CC.
10 GNU CC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
12 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
13 any later version.
15 GNU CC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
16 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
17 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
18 GNU General Public License for more details.
20 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
21 along with GNU CC; see the file COPYING. If not, write to
22 the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
23 Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */
25 #include "config.h"
26 #include "system.h"
27 #include "tree.h"
28 #include "rtl.h"
29 #include "regs.h"
30 #include "hard-reg-set.h"
31 #include "real.h"
32 #include "insn-config.h"
33 #include "conditions.h"
34 #include "output.h"
35 #include "insn-attr.h"
36 #include "flags.h"
37 #include "function.h"
38 #include "expr.h"
39 #include "optabs.h"
40 #include "libfuncs.h"
41 #include "recog.h"
42 #include "toplev.h"
43 #include "ggc.h"
44 #include "tm_p.h"
45 #include "debug.h"
46 #include "target.h"
47 #include "target-def.h"
49 /* 1 if the caller has placed an "unimp" insn immediately after the call.
50 This is used in v8 code when calling a function that returns a structure.
51 v9 doesn't have this. Be careful to have this test be the same as that
52 used on the call. */
54 #define SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P \
55 (!TARGET_ARCH64 && current_function_returns_struct \
56 && ! integer_zerop (DECL_SIZE (DECL_RESULT (current_function_decl))) \
57 && (TREE_CODE (DECL_SIZE (DECL_RESULT (current_function_decl))) \
58 == INTEGER_CST))
60 /* Global variables for machine-dependent things. */
62 /* Size of frame. Need to know this to emit return insns from leaf procedures.
63 ACTUAL_FSIZE is set by compute_frame_size() which is called during the
64 reload pass. This is important as the value is later used in insn
65 scheduling (to see what can go in a delay slot).
66 APPARENT_FSIZE is the size of the stack less the register save area and less
67 the outgoing argument area. It is used when saving call preserved regs. */
68 static int apparent_fsize;
69 static int actual_fsize;
71 /* Number of live general or floating point registers needed to be
72 saved (as 4-byte quantities). */
73 static int num_gfregs;
75 /* Save the operands last given to a compare for use when we
76 generate a scc or bcc insn. */
77 rtx sparc_compare_op0, sparc_compare_op1;
79 /* Coordinate with the md file wrt special insns created by
80 sparc_nonflat_function_epilogue. */
81 bool sparc_emitting_epilogue;
83 #ifdef LEAF_REGISTERS
85 /* Vector to say how input registers are mapped to output registers.
86 HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM cannot be remapped by this function to
87 eliminate it. You must use -fomit-frame-pointer to get that. */
88 const char leaf_reg_remap[] =
89 { 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,
90 -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, 14, -1,
91 -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1,
92 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, -1, 15,
94 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
95 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47,
96 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55,
97 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63,
98 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71,
99 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79,
100 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87,
101 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95,
102 96, 97, 98, 99, 100};
104 /* Vector, indexed by hard register number, which contains 1
105 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
106 function treatment. */
107 char sparc_leaf_regs[] =
108 { 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
109 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0,
110 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
111 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1,
112 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
113 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
114 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
115 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
116 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
117 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
118 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
119 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
120 1, 1, 1, 1, 1};
122 #endif
124 /* Name of where we pretend to think the frame pointer points.
125 Normally, this is "%fp", but if we are in a leaf procedure,
126 this is "%sp+something". We record "something" separately as it may be
127 too big for reg+constant addressing. */
129 static const char *frame_base_name;
130 static int frame_base_offset;
132 static void sparc_init_modes PARAMS ((void));
133 static int save_regs PARAMS ((FILE *, int, int, const char *,
134 int, int, int));
135 static int restore_regs PARAMS ((FILE *, int, int, const char *, int, int));
136 static void build_big_number PARAMS ((FILE *, int, const char *));
137 static int function_arg_slotno PARAMS ((const CUMULATIVE_ARGS *,
138 enum machine_mode, tree, int, int,
139 int *, int *));
141 static int supersparc_adjust_cost PARAMS ((rtx, rtx, rtx, int));
142 static int hypersparc_adjust_cost PARAMS ((rtx, rtx, rtx, int));
143 static int ultrasparc_adjust_cost PARAMS ((rtx, rtx, rtx, int));
145 static void sparc_output_addr_vec PARAMS ((rtx));
146 static void sparc_output_addr_diff_vec PARAMS ((rtx));
147 static void sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors PARAMS ((void));
148 static void sparc_add_gc_roots PARAMS ((void));
149 static void mark_ultrasparc_pipeline_state PARAMS ((void *));
150 static int check_return_regs PARAMS ((rtx));
151 static int epilogue_renumber PARAMS ((rtx *, int));
152 static bool sparc_assemble_integer PARAMS ((rtx, unsigned int, int));
153 static int ultra_cmove_results_ready_p PARAMS ((rtx));
154 static int ultra_fpmode_conflict_exists PARAMS ((enum machine_mode));
155 static rtx *ultra_find_type PARAMS ((int, rtx *, int));
156 static void ultra_build_types_avail PARAMS ((rtx *, int));
157 static void ultra_flush_pipeline PARAMS ((void));
158 static void ultra_rescan_pipeline_state PARAMS ((rtx *, int));
159 static int set_extends PARAMS ((rtx));
160 static void output_restore_regs PARAMS ((FILE *, int));
161 static void sparc_output_function_prologue PARAMS ((FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT));
162 static void sparc_output_function_epilogue PARAMS ((FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT));
163 static void sparc_flat_function_epilogue PARAMS ((FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT));
164 static void sparc_flat_function_prologue PARAMS ((FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT));
165 static void sparc_nonflat_function_epilogue PARAMS ((FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT,
166 int));
167 static void sparc_nonflat_function_prologue PARAMS ((FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT,
168 int));
169 #ifdef OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF
170 static void sparc_elf_asm_named_section PARAMS ((const char *, unsigned int));
171 #endif
172 static void ultrasparc_sched_reorder PARAMS ((FILE *, int, rtx *, int));
173 static int ultrasparc_variable_issue PARAMS ((rtx));
174 static void ultrasparc_sched_init PARAMS ((void));
176 static int sparc_adjust_cost PARAMS ((rtx, rtx, rtx, int));
177 static int sparc_issue_rate PARAMS ((void));
178 static int sparc_variable_issue PARAMS ((FILE *, int, rtx, int));
179 static void sparc_sched_init PARAMS ((FILE *, int, int));
180 static int sparc_sched_reorder PARAMS ((FILE *, int, rtx *, int *, int));
182 /* Option handling. */
184 /* Code model option as passed by user. */
185 const char *sparc_cmodel_string;
186 /* Parsed value. */
187 enum cmodel sparc_cmodel;
189 char sparc_hard_reg_printed[8];
191 struct sparc_cpu_select sparc_select[] =
193 /* switch name, tune arch */
194 { (char *)0, "default", 1, 1 },
195 { (char *)0, "-mcpu=", 1, 1 },
196 { (char *)0, "-mtune=", 1, 0 },
197 { 0, 0, 0, 0 }
200 /* CPU type. This is set from TARGET_CPU_DEFAULT and -m{cpu,tune}=xxx. */
201 enum processor_type sparc_cpu;
203 /* Initialize the GCC target structure. */
205 /* The sparc default is to use .half rather than .short for aligned
206 HI objects. Use .word instead of .long on non-ELF systems. */
207 #undef TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_HI_OP
208 #define TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_HI_OP "\t.half\t"
209 #ifndef OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF
210 #undef TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_SI_OP
211 #define TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_SI_OP "\t.word\t"
212 #endif
214 #undef TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_HI_OP
215 #define TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_HI_OP "\t.uahalf\t"
216 #undef TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_SI_OP
217 #define TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_SI_OP "\t.uaword\t"
218 #undef TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_DI_OP
219 #define TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_DI_OP "\t.uaxword\t"
221 /* The target hook has to handle DI-mode values. */
222 #undef TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
223 #define TARGET_ASM_INTEGER sparc_assemble_integer
225 #undef TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
226 #define TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE sparc_output_function_prologue
227 #undef TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
228 #define TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE sparc_output_function_epilogue
230 #undef TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST
231 #define TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST sparc_adjust_cost
232 #undef TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
233 #define TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE sparc_issue_rate
234 #undef TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
235 #define TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE sparc_variable_issue
236 #undef TARGET_SCHED_INIT
237 #define TARGET_SCHED_INIT sparc_sched_init
238 #undef TARGET_SCHED_REORDER
239 #define TARGET_SCHED_REORDER sparc_sched_reorder
241 struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
243 /* Validate and override various options, and do some machine dependent
244 initialization. */
246 void
247 sparc_override_options ()
249 static struct code_model {
250 const char *const name;
251 const int value;
252 } const cmodels[] = {
253 { "32", CM_32 },
254 { "medlow", CM_MEDLOW },
255 { "medmid", CM_MEDMID },
256 { "medany", CM_MEDANY },
257 { "embmedany", CM_EMBMEDANY },
258 { 0, 0 }
260 const struct code_model *cmodel;
261 /* Map TARGET_CPU_DEFAULT to value for -m{arch,tune}=. */
262 static struct cpu_default {
263 const int cpu;
264 const char *const name;
265 } const cpu_default[] = {
266 /* There must be one entry here for each TARGET_CPU value. */
267 { TARGET_CPU_sparc, "cypress" },
268 { TARGET_CPU_sparclet, "tsc701" },
269 { TARGET_CPU_sparclite, "f930" },
270 { TARGET_CPU_v8, "v8" },
271 { TARGET_CPU_hypersparc, "hypersparc" },
272 { TARGET_CPU_sparclite86x, "sparclite86x" },
273 { TARGET_CPU_supersparc, "supersparc" },
274 { TARGET_CPU_v9, "v9" },
275 { TARGET_CPU_ultrasparc, "ultrasparc" },
276 { 0, 0 }
278 const struct cpu_default *def;
279 /* Table of values for -m{cpu,tune}=. */
280 static struct cpu_table {
281 const char *const name;
282 const enum processor_type processor;
283 const int disable;
284 const int enable;
285 } const cpu_table[] = {
286 { "v7", PROCESSOR_V7, MASK_ISA, 0 },
287 { "cypress", PROCESSOR_CYPRESS, MASK_ISA, 0 },
288 { "v8", PROCESSOR_V8, MASK_ISA, MASK_V8 },
289 /* TI TMS390Z55 supersparc */
290 { "supersparc", PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC, MASK_ISA, MASK_V8 },
291 { "sparclite", PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLITE },
292 /* The Fujitsu MB86930 is the original sparclite chip, with no fpu.
293 The Fujitsu MB86934 is the recent sparclite chip, with an fpu. */
294 { "f930", PROCESSOR_F930, MASK_ISA|MASK_FPU, MASK_SPARCLITE },
295 { "f934", PROCESSOR_F934, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLITE|MASK_FPU },
296 { "hypersparc", PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC, MASK_ISA, MASK_V8|MASK_FPU },
297 { "sparclite86x", PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X, MASK_ISA|MASK_FPU,
298 MASK_SPARCLITE },
299 { "sparclet", PROCESSOR_SPARCLET, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLET },
300 /* TEMIC sparclet */
301 { "tsc701", PROCESSOR_TSC701, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLET },
302 { "v9", PROCESSOR_V9, MASK_ISA, MASK_V9 },
303 /* TI ultrasparc I, II, IIi */
304 { "ultrasparc", PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC, MASK_ISA, MASK_V9
305 /* Although insns using %y are deprecated, it is a clear win on current
306 ultrasparcs. */
307 |MASK_DEPRECATED_V8_INSNS},
308 { 0, 0, 0, 0 }
310 const struct cpu_table *cpu;
311 const struct sparc_cpu_select *sel;
312 int fpu;
314 #ifndef SPARC_BI_ARCH
315 /* Check for unsupported architecture size. */
316 if (! TARGET_64BIT != DEFAULT_ARCH32_P)
317 error ("%s is not supported by this configuration",
318 DEFAULT_ARCH32_P ? "-m64" : "-m32");
319 #endif
321 /* We force all 64bit archs to use 128 bit long double */
322 if (TARGET_64BIT && ! TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE_128)
324 error ("-mlong-double-64 not allowed with -m64");
325 target_flags |= MASK_LONG_DOUBLE_128;
328 /* Code model selection. */
329 sparc_cmodel = SPARC_DEFAULT_CMODEL;
331 #ifdef SPARC_BI_ARCH
332 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
333 sparc_cmodel = CM_32;
334 #endif
336 if (sparc_cmodel_string != NULL)
338 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
340 for (cmodel = &cmodels[0]; cmodel->name; cmodel++)
341 if (strcmp (sparc_cmodel_string, cmodel->name) == 0)
342 break;
343 if (cmodel->name == NULL)
344 error ("bad value (%s) for -mcmodel= switch", sparc_cmodel_string);
345 else
346 sparc_cmodel = cmodel->value;
348 else
349 error ("-mcmodel= is not supported on 32 bit systems");
352 fpu = TARGET_FPU; /* save current -mfpu status */
354 /* Set the default CPU. */
355 for (def = &cpu_default[0]; def->name; ++def)
356 if (def->cpu == TARGET_CPU_DEFAULT)
357 break;
358 if (! def->name)
359 abort ();
360 sparc_select[0].string = def->name;
362 for (sel = &sparc_select[0]; sel->name; ++sel)
364 if (sel->string)
366 for (cpu = &cpu_table[0]; cpu->name; ++cpu)
367 if (! strcmp (sel->string, cpu->name))
369 if (sel->set_tune_p)
370 sparc_cpu = cpu->processor;
372 if (sel->set_arch_p)
374 target_flags &= ~cpu->disable;
375 target_flags |= cpu->enable;
377 break;
380 if (! cpu->name)
381 error ("bad value (%s) for %s switch", sel->string, sel->name);
385 /* If -mfpu or -mno-fpu was explicitly used, don't override with
386 the processor default. Clear MASK_FPU_SET to avoid confusing
387 the reverse mapping from switch values to names. */
388 if (TARGET_FPU_SET)
390 target_flags = (target_flags & ~MASK_FPU) | fpu;
391 target_flags &= ~MASK_FPU_SET;
394 /* Don't allow -mvis if FPU is disabled. */
395 if (! TARGET_FPU)
396 target_flags &= ~MASK_VIS;
398 /* -mvis assumes UltraSPARC+, so we are sure v9 instructions
399 are available.
400 -m64 also implies v9. */
401 if (TARGET_VIS || TARGET_ARCH64)
403 target_flags |= MASK_V9;
404 target_flags &= ~(MASK_V8 | MASK_SPARCLET | MASK_SPARCLITE);
407 /* Use the deprecated v8 insns for sparc64 in 32 bit mode. */
408 if (TARGET_V9 && TARGET_ARCH32)
409 target_flags |= MASK_DEPRECATED_V8_INSNS;
411 /* V8PLUS requires V9, makes no sense in 64 bit mode. */
412 if (! TARGET_V9 || TARGET_ARCH64)
413 target_flags &= ~MASK_V8PLUS;
415 /* Don't use stack biasing in 32 bit mode. */
416 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
417 target_flags &= ~MASK_STACK_BIAS;
419 /* Supply a default value for align_functions. */
420 if (align_functions == 0 && sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC)
421 align_functions = 32;
423 /* Validate PCC_STRUCT_RETURN. */
424 if (flag_pcc_struct_return == DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN)
425 flag_pcc_struct_return = (TARGET_ARCH64 ? 0 : 1);
427 /* Only use .uaxword when compiling for a 64-bit target. */
428 if (!TARGET_ARCH64)
429 targetm.asm_out.unaligned_op.di = NULL;
431 /* Do various machine dependent initializations. */
432 sparc_init_modes ();
434 /* Register global variables with the garbage collector. */
435 sparc_add_gc_roots ();
438 /* Miscellaneous utilities. */
440 /* Nonzero if CODE, a comparison, is suitable for use in v9 conditional move
441 or branch on register contents instructions. */
444 v9_regcmp_p (code)
445 enum rtx_code code;
447 return (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GE || code == LT
448 || code == LE || code == GT);
452 /* Operand constraints. */
454 /* Return non-zero only if OP is a register of mode MODE,
455 or const0_rtx. */
458 reg_or_0_operand (op, mode)
459 rtx op;
460 enum machine_mode mode;
462 if (register_operand (op, mode))
463 return 1;
464 if (op == const0_rtx)
465 return 1;
466 if (GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
467 && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
468 && CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) == 0)
469 return 1;
470 if (fp_zero_operand (op, mode))
471 return 1;
472 return 0;
475 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point value with value 0.0. */
478 fp_zero_operand (op, mode)
479 rtx op;
480 enum machine_mode mode;
482 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op)) != MODE_FLOAT)
483 return 0;
484 return op == CONST0_RTX (mode);
487 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point constant which can
488 be loaded into an integer register using a single
489 sethi instruction. */
492 fp_sethi_p (op)
493 rtx op;
495 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
497 REAL_VALUE_TYPE r;
498 long i;
500 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, op);
501 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (r, dconst0) &&
502 ! REAL_VALUE_MINUS_ZERO (r))
503 return 0;
504 REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (r, i);
505 if (SPARC_SETHI_P (i))
506 return 1;
509 return 0;
512 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point constant which can
513 be loaded into an integer register using a single
514 mov instruction. */
517 fp_mov_p (op)
518 rtx op;
520 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
522 REAL_VALUE_TYPE r;
523 long i;
525 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, op);
526 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (r, dconst0) &&
527 ! REAL_VALUE_MINUS_ZERO (r))
528 return 0;
529 REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (r, i);
530 if (SPARC_SIMM13_P (i))
531 return 1;
534 return 0;
537 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point constant which can
538 be loaded into an integer register using a high/losum
539 instruction sequence. */
542 fp_high_losum_p (op)
543 rtx op;
545 /* The constraints calling this should only be in
546 SFmode move insns, so any constant which cannot
547 be moved using a single insn will do. */
548 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
550 REAL_VALUE_TYPE r;
551 long i;
553 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, op);
554 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (r, dconst0) &&
555 ! REAL_VALUE_MINUS_ZERO (r))
556 return 0;
557 REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (r, i);
558 if (! SPARC_SETHI_P (i)
559 && ! SPARC_SIMM13_P (i))
560 return 1;
563 return 0;
566 /* Nonzero if OP is an integer register. */
569 intreg_operand (op, mode)
570 rtx op;
571 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
573 return (register_operand (op, SImode)
574 || (TARGET_ARCH64 && register_operand (op, DImode)));
577 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point condition code register. */
580 fcc_reg_operand (op, mode)
581 rtx op;
582 enum machine_mode mode;
584 /* This can happen when recog is called from combine. Op may be a MEM.
585 Fail instead of calling abort in this case. */
586 if (GET_CODE (op) != REG)
587 return 0;
589 if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != GET_MODE (op))
590 return 0;
591 if (mode == VOIDmode
592 && (GET_MODE (op) != CCFPmode && GET_MODE (op) != CCFPEmode))
593 return 0;
595 #if 0 /* ??? ==> 1 when %fcc0-3 are pseudos first. See gen_compare_reg(). */
596 if (reg_renumber == 0)
597 return REGNO (op) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER;
598 return REGNO_OK_FOR_CCFP_P (REGNO (op));
599 #else
600 return (unsigned) REGNO (op) - SPARC_FIRST_V9_FCC_REG < 4;
601 #endif
604 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point condition code fcc0 register. */
607 fcc0_reg_operand (op, mode)
608 rtx op;
609 enum machine_mode mode;
611 /* This can happen when recog is called from combine. Op may be a MEM.
612 Fail instead of calling abort in this case. */
613 if (GET_CODE (op) != REG)
614 return 0;
616 if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != GET_MODE (op))
617 return 0;
618 if (mode == VOIDmode
619 && (GET_MODE (op) != CCFPmode && GET_MODE (op) != CCFPEmode))
620 return 0;
622 return REGNO (op) == SPARC_FCC_REG;
625 /* Nonzero if OP is an integer or floating point condition code register. */
628 icc_or_fcc_reg_operand (op, mode)
629 rtx op;
630 enum machine_mode mode;
632 if (GET_CODE (op) == REG && REGNO (op) == SPARC_ICC_REG)
634 if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != GET_MODE (op))
635 return 0;
636 if (mode == VOIDmode
637 && GET_MODE (op) != CCmode && GET_MODE (op) != CCXmode)
638 return 0;
639 return 1;
642 return fcc_reg_operand (op, mode);
645 /* Nonzero if OP can appear as the dest of a RESTORE insn. */
647 restore_operand (op, mode)
648 rtx op;
649 enum machine_mode mode;
651 return (GET_CODE (op) == REG && GET_MODE (op) == mode
652 && (REGNO (op) < 8 || (REGNO (op) >= 24 && REGNO (op) < 32)));
655 /* Call insn on SPARC can take a PC-relative constant address, or any regular
656 memory address. */
659 call_operand (op, mode)
660 rtx op;
661 enum machine_mode mode;
663 if (GET_CODE (op) != MEM)
664 abort ();
665 op = XEXP (op, 0);
666 return (symbolic_operand (op, mode) || memory_address_p (Pmode, op));
670 call_operand_address (op, mode)
671 rtx op;
672 enum machine_mode mode;
674 return (symbolic_operand (op, mode) || memory_address_p (Pmode, op));
677 /* Returns 1 if OP is either a symbol reference or a sum of a symbol
678 reference and a constant. */
681 symbolic_operand (op, mode)
682 register rtx op;
683 enum machine_mode mode;
685 enum machine_mode omode = GET_MODE (op);
687 if (omode != mode && omode != VOIDmode && mode != VOIDmode)
688 return 0;
690 switch (GET_CODE (op))
692 case SYMBOL_REF:
693 case LABEL_REF:
694 return 1;
696 case CONST:
697 op = XEXP (op, 0);
698 return ((GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
699 || GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == LABEL_REF)
700 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 1)) == CONST_INT);
702 default:
703 return 0;
707 /* Return truth value of statement that OP is a symbolic memory
708 operand of mode MODE. */
711 symbolic_memory_operand (op, mode)
712 rtx op;
713 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
715 if (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG)
716 op = SUBREG_REG (op);
717 if (GET_CODE (op) != MEM)
718 return 0;
719 op = XEXP (op, 0);
720 return (GET_CODE (op) == SYMBOL_REF || GET_CODE (op) == CONST
721 || GET_CODE (op) == HIGH || GET_CODE (op) == LABEL_REF);
724 /* Return truth value of statement that OP is a LABEL_REF of mode MODE. */
727 label_ref_operand (op, mode)
728 rtx op;
729 enum machine_mode mode;
731 if (GET_CODE (op) != LABEL_REF)
732 return 0;
733 if (GET_MODE (op) != mode)
734 return 0;
735 return 1;
738 /* Return 1 if the operand is an argument used in generating pic references
739 in either the medium/low or medium/anywhere code models of sparc64. */
742 sp64_medium_pic_operand (op, mode)
743 rtx op;
744 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
746 /* Check for (const (minus (symbol_ref:GOT)
747 (const (minus (label) (pc))))). */
748 if (GET_CODE (op) != CONST)
749 return 0;
750 op = XEXP (op, 0);
751 if (GET_CODE (op) != MINUS)
752 return 0;
753 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) != SYMBOL_REF)
754 return 0;
755 /* ??? Ensure symbol is GOT. */
756 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 1)) != CONST)
757 return 0;
758 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 1), 0)) != MINUS)
759 return 0;
760 return 1;
763 /* Return 1 if the operand is a data segment reference. This includes
764 the readonly data segment, or in other words anything but the text segment.
765 This is needed in the medium/anywhere code model on v9. These values
766 are accessed with EMBMEDANY_BASE_REG. */
769 data_segment_operand (op, mode)
770 rtx op;
771 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
773 switch (GET_CODE (op))
775 case SYMBOL_REF :
776 return ! SYMBOL_REF_FLAG (op);
777 case PLUS :
778 /* Assume canonical format of symbol + constant.
779 Fall through. */
780 case CONST :
781 return data_segment_operand (XEXP (op, 0), VOIDmode);
782 default :
783 return 0;
787 /* Return 1 if the operand is a text segment reference.
788 This is needed in the medium/anywhere code model on v9. */
791 text_segment_operand (op, mode)
792 rtx op;
793 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
795 switch (GET_CODE (op))
797 case LABEL_REF :
798 return 1;
799 case SYMBOL_REF :
800 return SYMBOL_REF_FLAG (op);
801 case PLUS :
802 /* Assume canonical format of symbol + constant.
803 Fall through. */
804 case CONST :
805 return text_segment_operand (XEXP (op, 0), VOIDmode);
806 default :
807 return 0;
811 /* Return 1 if the operand is either a register or a memory operand that is
812 not symbolic. */
815 reg_or_nonsymb_mem_operand (op, mode)
816 register rtx op;
817 enum machine_mode mode;
819 if (register_operand (op, mode))
820 return 1;
822 if (memory_operand (op, mode) && ! symbolic_memory_operand (op, mode))
823 return 1;
825 return 0;
829 splittable_symbolic_memory_operand (op, mode)
830 rtx op;
831 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
833 if (GET_CODE (op) != MEM)
834 return 0;
835 if (! symbolic_operand (XEXP (op, 0), Pmode))
836 return 0;
837 return 1;
841 splittable_immediate_memory_operand (op, mode)
842 rtx op;
843 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
845 if (GET_CODE (op) != MEM)
846 return 0;
847 if (! immediate_operand (XEXP (op, 0), Pmode))
848 return 0;
849 return 1;
852 /* Return truth value of whether OP is EQ or NE. */
855 eq_or_neq (op, mode)
856 rtx op;
857 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
859 return (GET_CODE (op) == EQ || GET_CODE (op) == NE);
862 /* Return 1 if this is a comparison operator, but not an EQ, NE, GEU,
863 or LTU for non-floating-point. We handle those specially. */
866 normal_comp_operator (op, mode)
867 rtx op;
868 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
870 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
872 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != '<')
873 return 0;
875 if (GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCFPmode
876 || GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCFPEmode)
877 return 1;
879 return (code != NE && code != EQ && code != GEU && code != LTU);
882 /* Return 1 if this is a comparison operator. This allows the use of
883 MATCH_OPERATOR to recognize all the branch insns. */
886 noov_compare_op (op, mode)
887 register rtx op;
888 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
890 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
892 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != '<')
893 return 0;
895 if (GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CC_NOOVmode
896 || GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCX_NOOVmode)
897 /* These are the only branches which work with CC_NOOVmode. */
898 return (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GE || code == LT);
899 return 1;
902 /* Return 1 if this is a 64-bit comparison operator. This allows the use of
903 MATCH_OPERATOR to recognize all the branch insns. */
906 noov_compare64_op (op, mode)
907 register rtx op;
908 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
910 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
912 if (! TARGET_V9)
913 return 0;
915 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != '<')
916 return 0;
918 if (GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCX_NOOVmode)
919 /* These are the only branches which work with CCX_NOOVmode. */
920 return (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GE || code == LT);
921 return (GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCXmode);
924 /* Nonzero if OP is a comparison operator suitable for use in v9
925 conditional move or branch on register contents instructions. */
928 v9_regcmp_op (op, mode)
929 register rtx op;
930 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
932 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
934 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != '<')
935 return 0;
937 return v9_regcmp_p (code);
940 /* Return 1 if this is a SIGN_EXTEND or ZERO_EXTEND operation. */
943 extend_op (op, mode)
944 rtx op;
945 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
947 return GET_CODE (op) == SIGN_EXTEND || GET_CODE (op) == ZERO_EXTEND;
950 /* Return nonzero if OP is an operator of mode MODE which can set
951 the condition codes explicitly. We do not include PLUS and MINUS
952 because these require CC_NOOVmode, which we handle explicitly. */
955 cc_arithop (op, mode)
956 rtx op;
957 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
959 if (GET_CODE (op) == AND
960 || GET_CODE (op) == IOR
961 || GET_CODE (op) == XOR)
962 return 1;
964 return 0;
967 /* Return nonzero if OP is an operator of mode MODE which can bitwise
968 complement its second operand and set the condition codes explicitly. */
971 cc_arithopn (op, mode)
972 rtx op;
973 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
975 /* XOR is not here because combine canonicalizes (xor (not ...) ...)
976 and (xor ... (not ...)) to (not (xor ...)). */
977 return (GET_CODE (op) == AND
978 || GET_CODE (op) == IOR);
981 /* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT that can fit in a
982 signed 13 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable SImode operand for
983 most 3 address instructions. */
986 arith_operand (op, mode)
987 rtx op;
988 enum machine_mode mode;
990 if (register_operand (op, mode))
991 return 1;
992 if (GET_CODE (op) != CONST_INT)
993 return 0;
994 return SMALL_INT32 (op);
997 /* Return true if OP is a constant 4096 */
1000 arith_4096_operand (op, mode)
1001 rtx op;
1002 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
1004 if (GET_CODE (op) != CONST_INT)
1005 return 0;
1006 else
1007 return INTVAL (op) == 4096;
1010 /* Return true if OP is suitable as second operand for add/sub */
1013 arith_add_operand (op, mode)
1014 rtx op;
1015 enum machine_mode mode;
1017 return arith_operand (op, mode) || arith_4096_operand (op, mode);
1020 /* Return true if OP is a CONST_INT or a CONST_DOUBLE which can fit in the
1021 immediate field of OR and XOR instructions. Used for 64-bit
1022 constant formation patterns. */
1024 const64_operand (op, mode)
1025 rtx op;
1026 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
1028 return ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1029 && SPARC_SIMM13_P (INTVAL (op)))
1030 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT != 64
1031 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1032 && SPARC_SIMM13_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op))
1033 && (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) ==
1034 ((CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x80000000) != 0 ?
1035 (HOST_WIDE_INT)-1 : 0)))
1036 #endif
1040 /* The same, but only for sethi instructions. */
1042 const64_high_operand (op, mode)
1043 rtx op;
1044 enum machine_mode mode;
1046 return ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1047 && (INTVAL (op) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff) != 0
1048 && SPARC_SETHI_P (INTVAL (op) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
1050 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1051 && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1052 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff) != 0
1053 && SPARC_SETHI_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op))));
1056 /* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT that can fit in a
1057 signed 11 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable SImode operand for
1058 the movcc instructions. */
1061 arith11_operand (op, mode)
1062 rtx op;
1063 enum machine_mode mode;
1065 return (register_operand (op, mode)
1066 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SPARC_SIMM11_P (INTVAL (op))));
1069 /* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT that can fit in a
1070 signed 10 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable SImode operand for
1071 the movrcc instructions. */
1074 arith10_operand (op, mode)
1075 rtx op;
1076 enum machine_mode mode;
1078 return (register_operand (op, mode)
1079 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SPARC_SIMM10_P (INTVAL (op))));
1082 /* Return true if OP is a register, is a CONST_INT that fits in a 13 bit
1083 immediate field, or is a CONST_DOUBLE whose both parts fit in a 13 bit
1084 immediate field.
1085 v9: Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE that
1086 can fit in a 13 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable DImode operand
1087 for most 3 address instructions. */
1090 arith_double_operand (op, mode)
1091 rtx op;
1092 enum machine_mode mode;
1094 return (register_operand (op, mode)
1095 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SMALL_INT (op))
1096 || (! TARGET_ARCH64
1097 && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1098 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) + 0x1000) < 0x2000
1099 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) + 0x1000) < 0x2000)
1100 || (TARGET_ARCH64
1101 && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1102 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) + 0x1000) < 0x2000
1103 && ((CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == -1
1104 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x1000) == 0x1000)
1105 || (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1106 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x1000) == 0))));
1109 /* Return true if OP is a constant 4096 for DImode on ARCH64 */
1112 arith_double_4096_operand (op, mode)
1113 rtx op;
1114 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
1116 return (TARGET_ARCH64 &&
1117 ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && INTVAL (op) == 4096) ||
1118 (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE &&
1119 CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) == 4096 &&
1120 CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0)));
1123 /* Return true if OP is suitable as second operand for add/sub in DImode */
1126 arith_double_add_operand (op, mode)
1127 rtx op;
1128 enum machine_mode mode;
1130 return arith_double_operand (op, mode) || arith_double_4096_operand (op, mode);
1133 /* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE that
1134 can fit in an 11 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable DImode
1135 operand for the movcc instructions. */
1136 /* ??? Replace with arith11_operand? */
1139 arith11_double_operand (op, mode)
1140 rtx op;
1141 enum machine_mode mode;
1143 return (register_operand (op, mode)
1144 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1145 && (GET_MODE (op) == mode || GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
1146 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) + 0x400) < 0x800
1147 && ((CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == -1
1148 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x400) == 0x400)
1149 || (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1150 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x400) == 0)))
1151 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1152 && (GET_MODE (op) == mode || GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
1153 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (INTVAL (op) + 0x400) < 0x800));
1156 /* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE that
1157 can fit in an 10 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable DImode
1158 operand for the movrcc instructions. */
1159 /* ??? Replace with arith10_operand? */
1162 arith10_double_operand (op, mode)
1163 rtx op;
1164 enum machine_mode mode;
1166 return (register_operand (op, mode)
1167 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1168 && (GET_MODE (op) == mode || GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
1169 && (unsigned) (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) + 0x200) < 0x400
1170 && ((CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == -1
1171 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x200) == 0x200)
1172 || (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1173 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x200) == 0)))
1174 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1175 && (GET_MODE (op) == mode || GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
1176 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (INTVAL (op) + 0x200) < 0x400));
1179 /* Return truth value of whether OP is an integer which fits the
1180 range constraining immediate operands in most three-address insns,
1181 which have a 13 bit immediate field. */
1184 small_int (op, mode)
1185 rtx op;
1186 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
1188 return (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SMALL_INT (op));
1192 small_int_or_double (op, mode)
1193 rtx op;
1194 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
1196 return ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SMALL_INT (op))
1197 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1198 && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1199 && SPARC_SIMM13_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op))));
1202 /* Recognize operand values for the umul instruction. That instruction sign
1203 extends immediate values just like all other sparc instructions, but
1204 interprets the extended result as an unsigned number. */
1207 uns_small_int (op, mode)
1208 rtx op;
1209 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
1211 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT > 32
1212 /* All allowed constants will fit a CONST_INT. */
1213 return (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1214 && ((INTVAL (op) >= 0 && INTVAL (op) < 0x1000)
1215 || (INTVAL (op) >= 0xFFFFF000
1216 && INTVAL (op) <= 0xFFFFFFFF)));
1217 #else
1218 return ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && (unsigned) INTVAL (op) < 0x1000)
1219 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1220 && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1221 && (unsigned) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) - 0xFFFFF000 < 0x1000));
1222 #endif
1226 uns_arith_operand (op, mode)
1227 rtx op;
1228 enum machine_mode mode;
1230 return register_operand (op, mode) || uns_small_int (op, mode);
1233 /* Return truth value of statement that OP is a call-clobbered register. */
1235 clobbered_register (op, mode)
1236 rtx op;
1237 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
1239 return (GET_CODE (op) == REG && call_used_regs[REGNO (op)]);
1242 /* Return 1 if OP is a valid operand for the source of a move insn. */
1245 input_operand (op, mode)
1246 rtx op;
1247 enum machine_mode mode;
1249 /* If both modes are non-void they must be the same. */
1250 if (mode != VOIDmode && GET_MODE (op) != VOIDmode && mode != GET_MODE (op))
1251 return 0;
1253 /* Only a tiny bit of handling for CONSTANT_P_RTX is necessary. */
1254 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST && GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CONSTANT_P_RTX)
1255 return 1;
1257 /* Allow any one instruction integer constant, and all CONST_INT
1258 variants when we are working in DImode and !arch64. */
1259 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
1260 && ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1261 && (SPARC_SETHI_P (INTVAL (op) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
1262 || SPARC_SIMM13_P (INTVAL (op))
1263 || (mode == DImode
1264 && ! TARGET_ARCH64)))
1265 || (TARGET_ARCH64
1266 && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1267 && ((CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1268 && SPARC_SETHI_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op)))
1270 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
1271 (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1272 && SPARC_SIMM13_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op)))
1273 #else
1274 (SPARC_SIMM13_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op))
1275 && (((CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x80000000) == 0
1276 && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0)
1277 || (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == -1
1278 && CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x80000000) != 0))
1279 #endif
1280 ))))
1281 return 1;
1283 /* If !arch64 and this is a DImode const, allow it so that
1284 the splits can be generated. */
1285 if (! TARGET_ARCH64
1286 && mode == DImode
1287 && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
1288 return 1;
1290 if (register_operand (op, mode))
1291 return 1;
1293 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT
1294 && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
1295 return 1;
1297 /* If this is a SUBREG, look inside so that we handle
1298 paradoxical ones. */
1299 if (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG)
1300 op = SUBREG_REG (op);
1302 /* Check for valid MEM forms. */
1303 if (GET_CODE (op) == MEM)
1305 rtx inside = XEXP (op, 0);
1307 if (GET_CODE (inside) == LO_SUM)
1309 /* We can't allow these because all of the splits
1310 (eventually as they trickle down into DFmode
1311 splits) require offsettable memory references. */
1312 if (! TARGET_V9
1313 && GET_MODE (op) == TFmode)
1314 return 0;
1316 return (register_operand (XEXP (inside, 0), Pmode)
1317 && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (inside, 1)));
1319 return memory_address_p (mode, inside);
1322 return 0;
1326 /* We know it can't be done in one insn when we get here,
1327 the movsi expander guarentees this. */
1328 void
1329 sparc_emit_set_const32 (op0, op1)
1330 rtx op0;
1331 rtx op1;
1333 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (op0);
1334 rtx temp;
1336 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
1338 HOST_WIDE_INT value = INTVAL (op1);
1340 if (SPARC_SETHI_P (value & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
1341 || SPARC_SIMM13_P (value))
1342 abort ();
1345 /* Full 2-insn decomposition is needed. */
1346 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
1347 temp = op0;
1348 else
1349 temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
1351 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
1353 /* Emit them as real moves instead of a HIGH/LO_SUM,
1354 this way CSE can see everything and reuse intermediate
1355 values if it wants. */
1356 if (TARGET_ARCH64
1357 && HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT != 64
1358 && (INTVAL (op1) & 0x80000000) != 0)
1359 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET
1360 (VOIDmode, temp,
1361 gen_rtx_CONST_DOUBLE (VOIDmode,
1362 INTVAL (op1) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff,
1363 0)));
1364 else
1365 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp,
1366 GEN_INT (INTVAL (op1)
1367 & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff)));
1369 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
1370 op0,
1371 gen_rtx_IOR (mode, temp,
1372 GEN_INT (INTVAL (op1) & 0x3ff))));
1374 else
1376 /* A symbol, emit in the traditional way. */
1377 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp,
1378 gen_rtx_HIGH (mode, op1)));
1379 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
1380 op0, gen_rtx_LO_SUM (mode, temp, op1)));
1386 /* Sparc-v9 code-model support. */
1387 void
1388 sparc_emit_set_symbolic_const64 (op0, op1, temp1)
1389 rtx op0;
1390 rtx op1;
1391 rtx temp1;
1393 rtx ti_temp1 = 0;
1395 if (temp1 && GET_MODE (temp1) == TImode)
1397 ti_temp1 = temp1;
1398 temp1 = gen_rtx_REG (DImode, REGNO (temp1));
1401 switch (sparc_cmodel)
1403 case CM_MEDLOW:
1404 /* The range spanned by all instructions in the object is less
1405 than 2^31 bytes (2GB) and the distance from any instruction
1406 to the location of the label _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ is less
1407 than 2^31 bytes (2GB).
1409 The executable must be in the low 4TB of the virtual address
1410 space.
1412 sethi %hi(symbol), %temp
1413 or %temp, %lo(symbol), %reg */
1414 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp1, gen_rtx_HIGH (DImode, op1)));
1415 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, gen_rtx_LO_SUM (DImode, temp1, op1)));
1416 break;
1418 case CM_MEDMID:
1419 /* The range spanned by all instructions in the object is less
1420 than 2^31 bytes (2GB) and the distance from any instruction
1421 to the location of the label _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ is less
1422 than 2^31 bytes (2GB).
1424 The executable must be in the low 16TB of the virtual address
1425 space.
1427 sethi %h44(symbol), %temp1
1428 or %temp1, %m44(symbol), %temp2
1429 sllx %temp2, 12, %temp3
1430 or %temp3, %l44(symbol), %reg */
1431 emit_insn (gen_seth44 (op0, op1));
1432 emit_insn (gen_setm44 (op0, op0, op1));
1433 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp1,
1434 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, op0, GEN_INT (12))));
1435 emit_insn (gen_setl44 (op0, temp1, op1));
1436 break;
1438 case CM_MEDANY:
1439 /* The range spanned by all instructions in the object is less
1440 than 2^31 bytes (2GB) and the distance from any instruction
1441 to the location of the label _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ is less
1442 than 2^31 bytes (2GB).
1444 The executable can be placed anywhere in the virtual address
1445 space.
1447 sethi %hh(symbol), %temp1
1448 sethi %lm(symbol), %temp2
1449 or %temp1, %hm(symbol), %temp3
1450 or %temp2, %lo(symbol), %temp4
1451 sllx %temp3, 32, %temp5
1452 or %temp4, %temp5, %reg */
1454 /* It is possible that one of the registers we got for operands[2]
1455 might coincide with that of operands[0] (which is why we made
1456 it TImode). Pick the other one to use as our scratch. */
1457 if (rtx_equal_p (temp1, op0))
1459 if (ti_temp1)
1460 temp1 = gen_rtx_REG (DImode, REGNO (temp1) + 1);
1461 else
1462 abort();
1465 emit_insn (gen_sethh (op0, op1));
1466 emit_insn (gen_setlm (temp1, op1));
1467 emit_insn (gen_sethm (op0, op0, op1));
1468 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1469 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, op0, GEN_INT (32))));
1470 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1471 gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, op0, temp1)));
1472 emit_insn (gen_setlo (op0, op0, op1));
1473 break;
1475 case CM_EMBMEDANY:
1476 /* Old old old backwards compatibility kruft here.
1477 Essentially it is MEDLOW with a fixed 64-bit
1478 virtual base added to all data segment addresses.
1479 Text-segment stuff is computed like MEDANY, we can't
1480 reuse the code above because the relocation knobs
1481 look different.
1483 Data segment: sethi %hi(symbol), %temp1
1484 or %temp1, %lo(symbol), %temp2
1485 add %temp2, EMBMEDANY_BASE_REG, %reg
1487 Text segment: sethi %uhi(symbol), %temp1
1488 sethi %hi(symbol), %temp2
1489 or %temp1, %ulo(symbol), %temp3
1490 or %temp2, %lo(symbol), %temp4
1491 sllx %temp3, 32, %temp5
1492 or %temp4, %temp5, %reg */
1493 if (data_segment_operand (op1, GET_MODE (op1)))
1495 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_sethi (temp1, op1));
1496 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_brsum (op0, temp1));
1497 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_losum (op0, op0, op1));
1499 else
1501 /* It is possible that one of the registers we got for operands[2]
1502 might coincide with that of operands[0] (which is why we made
1503 it TImode). Pick the other one to use as our scratch. */
1504 if (rtx_equal_p (temp1, op0))
1506 if (ti_temp1)
1507 temp1 = gen_rtx_REG (DImode, REGNO (temp1) + 1);
1508 else
1509 abort();
1512 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_textuhi (op0, op1));
1513 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_texthi (temp1, op1));
1514 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_textulo (op0, op0, op1));
1515 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1516 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, op0, GEN_INT (32))));
1517 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1518 gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, op0, temp1)));
1519 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_textlo (op0, op0, op1));
1521 break;
1523 default:
1524 abort();
1528 /* These avoid problems when cross compiling. If we do not
1529 go through all this hair then the optimizer will see
1530 invalid REG_EQUAL notes or in some cases none at all. */
1531 static void sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 PARAMS ((rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT));
1532 static rtx gen_safe_SET64 PARAMS ((rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT));
1533 static rtx gen_safe_OR64 PARAMS ((rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT));
1534 static rtx gen_safe_XOR64 PARAMS ((rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT));
1536 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
1537 #define GEN_HIGHINT64(__x) GEN_INT ((__x) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff)
1538 #define GEN_INT64(__x) GEN_INT (__x)
1539 #else
1540 #define GEN_HIGHINT64(__x) \
1541 gen_rtx_CONST_DOUBLE (VOIDmode, (__x) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff, 0)
1542 #define GEN_INT64(__x) \
1543 gen_rtx_CONST_DOUBLE (VOIDmode, (__x) & 0xffffffff, \
1544 ((__x) & 0x80000000 \
1545 ? -1 : 0))
1546 #endif
1548 /* The optimizer is not to assume anything about exactly
1549 which bits are set for a HIGH, they are unspecified.
1550 Unfortunately this leads to many missed optimizations
1551 during CSE. We mask out the non-HIGH bits, and matches
1552 a plain movdi, to alleviate this problem. */
1553 static void
1554 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (dest, val)
1555 rtx dest;
1556 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
1558 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, GEN_HIGHINT64 (val)));
1561 static rtx
1562 gen_safe_SET64 (dest, val)
1563 rtx dest;
1564 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
1566 return gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, GEN_INT64 (val));
1569 static rtx
1570 gen_safe_OR64 (src, val)
1571 rtx src;
1572 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
1574 return gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, src, GEN_INT64 (val));
1577 static rtx
1578 gen_safe_XOR64 (src, val)
1579 rtx src;
1580 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
1582 return gen_rtx_XOR (DImode, src, GEN_INT64 (val));
1585 /* Worker routines for 64-bit constant formation on arch64.
1586 One of the key things to be doing in these emissions is
1587 to create as many temp REGs as possible. This makes it
1588 possible for half-built constants to be used later when
1589 such values are similar to something required later on.
1590 Without doing this, the optimizer cannot see such
1591 opportunities. */
1593 static void sparc_emit_set_const64_quick1
1594 PARAMS ((rtx, rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, int));
1596 static void
1597 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick1 (op0, temp, low_bits, is_neg)
1598 rtx op0;
1599 rtx temp;
1600 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits;
1601 int is_neg;
1603 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits;
1605 if (is_neg)
1606 high_bits = (~low_bits) & 0xffffffff;
1607 else
1608 high_bits = low_bits;
1610 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp, high_bits);
1611 if (!is_neg)
1613 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1614 gen_safe_OR64 (temp, (high_bits & 0x3ff))));
1616 else
1618 /* If we are XOR'ing with -1, then we should emit a one's complement
1619 instead. This way the combiner will notice logical operations
1620 such as ANDN later on and substitute. */
1621 if ((low_bits & 0x3ff) == 0x3ff)
1623 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1624 gen_rtx_NOT (DImode, temp)));
1626 else
1628 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1629 gen_safe_XOR64 (temp,
1630 (-(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x400
1631 | (low_bits & 0x3ff)))));
1636 static void sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2
1637 PARAMS ((rtx, rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
1638 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, int));
1640 static void
1641 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (op0, temp, high_bits, low_immediate, shift_count)
1642 rtx op0;
1643 rtx temp;
1644 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits;
1645 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_immediate;
1646 int shift_count;
1648 rtx temp2 = op0;
1650 if ((high_bits & 0xfffffc00) != 0)
1652 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp, high_bits);
1653 if ((high_bits & ~0xfffffc00) != 0)
1654 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1655 gen_safe_OR64 (temp, (high_bits & 0x3ff))));
1656 else
1657 temp2 = temp;
1659 else
1661 emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, high_bits));
1662 temp2 = temp;
1665 /* Now shift it up into place. */
1666 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1667 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, temp2,
1668 GEN_INT (shift_count))));
1670 /* If there is a low immediate part piece, finish up by
1671 putting that in as well. */
1672 if (low_immediate != 0)
1673 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1674 gen_safe_OR64 (op0, low_immediate)));
1677 static void sparc_emit_set_const64_longway
1678 PARAMS ((rtx, rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT));
1680 /* Full 64-bit constant decomposition. Even though this is the
1681 'worst' case, we still optimize a few things away. */
1682 static void
1683 sparc_emit_set_const64_longway (op0, temp, high_bits, low_bits)
1684 rtx op0;
1685 rtx temp;
1686 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits;
1687 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits;
1689 rtx sub_temp;
1691 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
1692 sub_temp = op0;
1693 else
1694 sub_temp = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
1696 if ((high_bits & 0xfffffc00) != 0)
1698 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp, high_bits);
1699 if ((high_bits & ~0xfffffc00) != 0)
1700 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
1701 sub_temp,
1702 gen_safe_OR64 (temp, (high_bits & 0x3ff))));
1703 else
1704 sub_temp = temp;
1706 else
1708 emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, high_bits));
1709 sub_temp = temp;
1712 if (!reload_in_progress && !reload_completed)
1714 rtx temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
1715 rtx temp3 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
1716 rtx temp4 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
1718 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp4,
1719 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp,
1720 GEN_INT (32))));
1722 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp2, low_bits);
1723 if ((low_bits & ~0xfffffc00) != 0)
1725 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp3,
1726 gen_safe_OR64 (temp2, (low_bits & 0x3ff))));
1727 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1728 gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, temp4, temp3)));
1730 else
1732 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1733 gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, temp4, temp2)));
1736 else
1738 rtx low1 = GEN_INT ((low_bits >> (32 - 12)) & 0xfff);
1739 rtx low2 = GEN_INT ((low_bits >> (32 - 12 - 12)) & 0xfff);
1740 rtx low3 = GEN_INT ((low_bits >> (32 - 12 - 12 - 8)) & 0x0ff);
1741 int to_shift = 12;
1743 /* We are in the middle of reload, so this is really
1744 painful. However we do still make an attempt to
1745 avoid emitting truly stupid code. */
1746 if (low1 != const0_rtx)
1748 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1749 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp,
1750 GEN_INT (to_shift))));
1751 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1752 gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, op0, low1)));
1753 sub_temp = op0;
1754 to_shift = 12;
1756 else
1758 to_shift += 12;
1760 if (low2 != const0_rtx)
1762 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1763 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp,
1764 GEN_INT (to_shift))));
1765 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1766 gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, op0, low2)));
1767 sub_temp = op0;
1768 to_shift = 8;
1770 else
1772 to_shift += 8;
1774 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1775 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp,
1776 GEN_INT (to_shift))));
1777 if (low3 != const0_rtx)
1778 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1779 gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, op0, low3)));
1780 /* phew... */
1784 /* Analyze a 64-bit constant for certain properties. */
1785 static void analyze_64bit_constant
1786 PARAMS ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
1787 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
1788 int *, int *, int *));
1790 static void
1791 analyze_64bit_constant (high_bits, low_bits, hbsp, lbsp, abbasp)
1792 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits, low_bits;
1793 int *hbsp, *lbsp, *abbasp;
1795 int lowest_bit_set, highest_bit_set, all_bits_between_are_set;
1796 int i;
1798 lowest_bit_set = highest_bit_set = -1;
1799 i = 0;
1802 if ((lowest_bit_set == -1)
1803 && ((low_bits >> i) & 1))
1804 lowest_bit_set = i;
1805 if ((highest_bit_set == -1)
1806 && ((high_bits >> (32 - i - 1)) & 1))
1807 highest_bit_set = (64 - i - 1);
1809 while (++i < 32
1810 && ((highest_bit_set == -1)
1811 || (lowest_bit_set == -1)));
1812 if (i == 32)
1814 i = 0;
1817 if ((lowest_bit_set == -1)
1818 && ((high_bits >> i) & 1))
1819 lowest_bit_set = i + 32;
1820 if ((highest_bit_set == -1)
1821 && ((low_bits >> (32 - i - 1)) & 1))
1822 highest_bit_set = 32 - i - 1;
1824 while (++i < 32
1825 && ((highest_bit_set == -1)
1826 || (lowest_bit_set == -1)));
1828 /* If there are no bits set this should have gone out
1829 as one instruction! */
1830 if (lowest_bit_set == -1
1831 || highest_bit_set == -1)
1832 abort ();
1833 all_bits_between_are_set = 1;
1834 for (i = lowest_bit_set; i <= highest_bit_set; i++)
1836 if (i < 32)
1838 if ((low_bits & (1 << i)) != 0)
1839 continue;
1841 else
1843 if ((high_bits & (1 << (i - 32))) != 0)
1844 continue;
1846 all_bits_between_are_set = 0;
1847 break;
1849 *hbsp = highest_bit_set;
1850 *lbsp = lowest_bit_set;
1851 *abbasp = all_bits_between_are_set;
1854 static int const64_is_2insns
1855 PARAMS ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT));
1857 static int
1858 const64_is_2insns (high_bits, low_bits)
1859 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits, low_bits;
1861 int highest_bit_set, lowest_bit_set, all_bits_between_are_set;
1863 if (high_bits == 0
1864 || high_bits == 0xffffffff)
1865 return 1;
1867 analyze_64bit_constant (high_bits, low_bits,
1868 &highest_bit_set, &lowest_bit_set,
1869 &all_bits_between_are_set);
1871 if ((highest_bit_set == 63
1872 || lowest_bit_set == 0)
1873 && all_bits_between_are_set != 0)
1874 return 1;
1876 if ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 21)
1877 return 1;
1879 return 0;
1882 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT create_simple_focus_bits
1883 PARAMS ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
1884 int, int));
1886 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
1887 create_simple_focus_bits (high_bits, low_bits, lowest_bit_set, shift)
1888 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits, low_bits;
1889 int lowest_bit_set, shift;
1891 HOST_WIDE_INT hi, lo;
1893 if (lowest_bit_set < 32)
1895 lo = (low_bits >> lowest_bit_set) << shift;
1896 hi = ((high_bits << (32 - lowest_bit_set)) << shift);
1898 else
1900 lo = 0;
1901 hi = ((high_bits >> (lowest_bit_set - 32)) << shift);
1903 if (hi & lo)
1904 abort ();
1905 return (hi | lo);
1908 /* Here we are sure to be arch64 and this is an integer constant
1909 being loaded into a register. Emit the most efficient
1910 insn sequence possible. Detection of all the 1-insn cases
1911 has been done already. */
1912 void
1913 sparc_emit_set_const64 (op0, op1)
1914 rtx op0;
1915 rtx op1;
1917 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits, low_bits;
1918 int lowest_bit_set, highest_bit_set;
1919 int all_bits_between_are_set;
1920 rtx temp;
1922 /* Sanity check that we know what we are working with. */
1923 if (! TARGET_ARCH64)
1924 abort ();
1926 if (GET_CODE (op0) != SUBREG)
1928 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG
1929 || (REGNO (op0) >= SPARC_FIRST_FP_REG
1930 && REGNO (op0) <= SPARC_LAST_V9_FP_REG))
1931 abort ();
1934 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
1935 temp = op0;
1936 else
1937 temp = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
1939 if (GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_DOUBLE
1940 && GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT)
1942 sparc_emit_set_symbolic_const64 (op0, op1, temp);
1943 return;
1946 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE)
1948 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
1949 high_bits = (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1) >> 32) & 0xffffffff;
1950 low_bits = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1) & 0xffffffff;
1951 #else
1952 high_bits = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op1);
1953 low_bits = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1);
1954 #endif
1956 else
1958 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
1959 high_bits = ((INTVAL (op1) >> 32) & 0xffffffff);
1960 low_bits = (INTVAL (op1) & 0xffffffff);
1961 #else
1962 high_bits = ((INTVAL (op1) < 0) ?
1963 0xffffffff :
1964 0x00000000);
1965 low_bits = INTVAL (op1);
1966 #endif
1969 /* low_bits bits 0 --> 31
1970 high_bits bits 32 --> 63 */
1972 analyze_64bit_constant (high_bits, low_bits,
1973 &highest_bit_set, &lowest_bit_set,
1974 &all_bits_between_are_set);
1976 /* First try for a 2-insn sequence. */
1978 /* These situations are preferred because the optimizer can
1979 * do more things with them:
1980 * 1) mov -1, %reg
1981 * sllx %reg, shift, %reg
1982 * 2) mov -1, %reg
1983 * srlx %reg, shift, %reg
1984 * 3) mov some_small_const, %reg
1985 * sllx %reg, shift, %reg
1987 if (((highest_bit_set == 63
1988 || lowest_bit_set == 0)
1989 && all_bits_between_are_set != 0)
1990 || ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 12))
1992 HOST_WIDE_INT the_const = -1;
1993 int shift = lowest_bit_set;
1995 if ((highest_bit_set != 63
1996 && lowest_bit_set != 0)
1997 || all_bits_between_are_set == 0)
1999 the_const =
2000 create_simple_focus_bits (high_bits, low_bits,
2001 lowest_bit_set, 0);
2003 else if (lowest_bit_set == 0)
2004 shift = -(63 - highest_bit_set);
2006 if (! SPARC_SIMM13_P (the_const))
2007 abort ();
2009 emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, the_const));
2010 if (shift > 0)
2011 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2012 op0,
2013 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode,
2014 temp,
2015 GEN_INT (shift))));
2016 else if (shift < 0)
2017 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2018 op0,
2019 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (DImode,
2020 temp,
2021 GEN_INT (-shift))));
2022 else
2023 abort ();
2024 return;
2027 /* Now a range of 22 or less bits set somewhere.
2028 * 1) sethi %hi(focus_bits), %reg
2029 * sllx %reg, shift, %reg
2030 * 2) sethi %hi(focus_bits), %reg
2031 * srlx %reg, shift, %reg
2033 if ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 21)
2035 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT focus_bits =
2036 create_simple_focus_bits (high_bits, low_bits,
2037 lowest_bit_set, 10);
2039 if (! SPARC_SETHI_P (focus_bits))
2040 abort ();
2042 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp, focus_bits);
2044 /* If lowest_bit_set == 10 then a sethi alone could have done it. */
2045 if (lowest_bit_set < 10)
2046 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2047 op0,
2048 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (DImode, temp,
2049 GEN_INT (10 - lowest_bit_set))));
2050 else if (lowest_bit_set > 10)
2051 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2052 op0,
2053 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, temp,
2054 GEN_INT (lowest_bit_set - 10))));
2055 else
2056 abort ();
2057 return;
2060 /* 1) sethi %hi(low_bits), %reg
2061 * or %reg, %lo(low_bits), %reg
2062 * 2) sethi %hi(~low_bits), %reg
2063 * xor %reg, %lo(-0x400 | (low_bits & 0x3ff)), %reg
2065 if (high_bits == 0
2066 || high_bits == 0xffffffff)
2068 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick1 (op0, temp, low_bits,
2069 (high_bits == 0xffffffff));
2070 return;
2073 /* Now, try 3-insn sequences. */
2075 /* 1) sethi %hi(high_bits), %reg
2076 * or %reg, %lo(high_bits), %reg
2077 * sllx %reg, 32, %reg
2079 if (low_bits == 0)
2081 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (op0, temp, high_bits, 0, 32);
2082 return;
2085 /* We may be able to do something quick
2086 when the constant is negated, so try that. */
2087 if (const64_is_2insns ((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff,
2088 (~low_bits) & 0xfffffc00))
2090 /* NOTE: The trailing bits get XOR'd so we need the
2091 non-negated bits, not the negated ones. */
2092 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT trailing_bits = low_bits & 0x3ff;
2094 if ((((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff) == 0
2095 && ((~low_bits) & 0x80000000) == 0)
2096 || (((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff) == 0xffffffff
2097 && ((~low_bits) & 0x80000000) != 0))
2099 int fast_int = (~low_bits & 0xffffffff);
2101 if ((SPARC_SETHI_P (fast_int)
2102 && (~high_bits & 0xffffffff) == 0)
2103 || SPARC_SIMM13_P (fast_int))
2104 emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, fast_int));
2105 else
2106 sparc_emit_set_const64 (temp, GEN_INT64 (fast_int));
2108 else
2110 rtx negated_const;
2111 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
2112 negated_const = GEN_INT (((~low_bits) & 0xfffffc00) |
2113 (((HOST_WIDE_INT)((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff))<<32));
2114 #else
2115 negated_const = gen_rtx_CONST_DOUBLE (DImode,
2116 (~low_bits) & 0xfffffc00,
2117 (~high_bits) & 0xffffffff);
2118 #endif
2119 sparc_emit_set_const64 (temp, negated_const);
2122 /* If we are XOR'ing with -1, then we should emit a one's complement
2123 instead. This way the combiner will notice logical operations
2124 such as ANDN later on and substitute. */
2125 if (trailing_bits == 0x3ff)
2127 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
2128 gen_rtx_NOT (DImode, temp)));
2130 else
2132 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2133 op0,
2134 gen_safe_XOR64 (temp,
2135 (-0x400 | trailing_bits))));
2137 return;
2140 /* 1) sethi %hi(xxx), %reg
2141 * or %reg, %lo(xxx), %reg
2142 * sllx %reg, yyy, %reg
2144 * ??? This is just a generalized version of the low_bits==0
2145 * thing above, FIXME...
2147 if ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 32)
2149 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT focus_bits =
2150 create_simple_focus_bits (high_bits, low_bits,
2151 lowest_bit_set, 0);
2153 /* We can't get here in this state. */
2154 if (highest_bit_set < 32
2155 || lowest_bit_set >= 32)
2156 abort ();
2158 /* So what we know is that the set bits straddle the
2159 middle of the 64-bit word. */
2160 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (op0, temp,
2161 focus_bits, 0,
2162 lowest_bit_set);
2163 return;
2166 /* 1) sethi %hi(high_bits), %reg
2167 * or %reg, %lo(high_bits), %reg
2168 * sllx %reg, 32, %reg
2169 * or %reg, low_bits, %reg
2171 if (SPARC_SIMM13_P(low_bits)
2172 && ((int)low_bits > 0))
2174 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (op0, temp, high_bits, low_bits, 32);
2175 return;
2178 /* The easiest way when all else fails, is full decomposition. */
2179 #if 0
2180 printf ("sparc_emit_set_const64: Hard constant [%08lx%08lx] neg[%08lx%08lx]\n",
2181 high_bits, low_bits, ~high_bits, ~low_bits);
2182 #endif
2183 sparc_emit_set_const64_longway (op0, temp, high_bits, low_bits);
2186 /* Given a comparison code (EQ, NE, etc.) and the first operand of a COMPARE,
2187 return the mode to be used for the comparison. For floating-point,
2188 CCFP[E]mode is used. CC_NOOVmode should be used when the first operand
2189 is a PLUS, MINUS, NEG, or ASHIFT. CCmode should be used when no special
2190 processing is needed. */
2192 enum machine_mode
2193 select_cc_mode (op, x, y)
2194 enum rtx_code op;
2195 rtx x;
2196 rtx y ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
2198 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_FLOAT)
2200 switch (op)
2202 case EQ:
2203 case NE:
2204 case UNORDERED:
2205 case ORDERED:
2206 case UNLT:
2207 case UNLE:
2208 case UNGT:
2209 case UNGE:
2210 case UNEQ:
2211 case LTGT:
2212 return CCFPmode;
2214 case LT:
2215 case LE:
2216 case GT:
2217 case GE:
2218 return CCFPEmode;
2220 default:
2221 abort ();
2224 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS || GET_CODE (x) == MINUS
2225 || GET_CODE (x) == NEG || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFT)
2227 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && GET_MODE (x) == DImode)
2228 return CCX_NOOVmode;
2229 else
2230 return CC_NOOVmode;
2232 else
2234 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && GET_MODE (x) == DImode)
2235 return CCXmode;
2236 else
2237 return CCmode;
2241 /* X and Y are two things to compare using CODE. Emit the compare insn and
2242 return the rtx for the cc reg in the proper mode. */
2245 gen_compare_reg (code, x, y)
2246 enum rtx_code code;
2247 rtx x, y;
2249 enum machine_mode mode = SELECT_CC_MODE (code, x, y);
2250 rtx cc_reg;
2252 /* ??? We don't have movcc patterns so we cannot generate pseudo regs for the
2253 fcc regs (cse can't tell they're really call clobbered regs and will
2254 remove a duplicate comparison even if there is an intervening function
2255 call - it will then try to reload the cc reg via an int reg which is why
2256 we need the movcc patterns). It is possible to provide the movcc
2257 patterns by using the ldxfsr/stxfsr v9 insns. I tried it: you need two
2258 registers (say %g1,%g5) and it takes about 6 insns. A better fix would be
2259 to tell cse that CCFPE mode registers (even pseudos) are call
2260 clobbered. */
2262 /* ??? This is an experiment. Rather than making changes to cse which may
2263 or may not be easy/clean, we do our own cse. This is possible because
2264 we will generate hard registers. Cse knows they're call clobbered (it
2265 doesn't know the same thing about pseudos). If we guess wrong, no big
2266 deal, but if we win, great! */
2268 if (TARGET_V9 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_FLOAT)
2269 #if 1 /* experiment */
2271 int reg;
2272 /* We cycle through the registers to ensure they're all exercised. */
2273 static int next_fcc_reg = 0;
2274 /* Previous x,y for each fcc reg. */
2275 static rtx prev_args[4][2];
2277 /* Scan prev_args for x,y. */
2278 for (reg = 0; reg < 4; reg++)
2279 if (prev_args[reg][0] == x && prev_args[reg][1] == y)
2280 break;
2281 if (reg == 4)
2283 reg = next_fcc_reg;
2284 prev_args[reg][0] = x;
2285 prev_args[reg][1] = y;
2286 next_fcc_reg = (next_fcc_reg + 1) & 3;
2288 cc_reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, reg + SPARC_FIRST_V9_FCC_REG);
2290 #else
2291 cc_reg = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
2292 #endif /* ! experiment */
2293 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_FLOAT)
2294 cc_reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, SPARC_FCC_REG);
2295 else
2296 cc_reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, SPARC_ICC_REG);
2298 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, cc_reg,
2299 gen_rtx_COMPARE (mode, x, y)));
2301 return cc_reg;
2304 /* This function is used for v9 only.
2305 CODE is the code for an Scc's comparison.
2306 OPERANDS[0] is the target of the Scc insn.
2307 OPERANDS[1] is the value we compare against const0_rtx (which hasn't
2308 been generated yet).
2310 This function is needed to turn
2312 (set (reg:SI 110)
2313 (gt (reg:CCX 100 %icc)
2314 (const_int 0)))
2315 into
2316 (set (reg:SI 110)
2317 (gt:DI (reg:CCX 100 %icc)
2318 (const_int 0)))
2320 IE: The instruction recognizer needs to see the mode of the comparison to
2321 find the right instruction. We could use "gt:DI" right in the
2322 define_expand, but leaving it out allows us to handle DI, SI, etc.
2324 We refer to the global sparc compare operands sparc_compare_op0 and
2325 sparc_compare_op1. */
2328 gen_v9_scc (compare_code, operands)
2329 enum rtx_code compare_code;
2330 register rtx *operands;
2332 rtx temp, op0, op1;
2334 if (! TARGET_ARCH64
2335 && (GET_MODE (sparc_compare_op0) == DImode
2336 || GET_MODE (operands[0]) == DImode))
2337 return 0;
2339 op0 = sparc_compare_op0;
2340 op1 = sparc_compare_op1;
2342 /* Try to use the movrCC insns. */
2343 if (TARGET_ARCH64
2344 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_INT
2345 && op1 == const0_rtx
2346 && v9_regcmp_p (compare_code))
2348 /* Special case for op0 != 0. This can be done with one instruction if
2349 operands[0] == sparc_compare_op0. */
2351 if (compare_code == NE
2352 && GET_MODE (operands[0]) == DImode
2353 && rtx_equal_p (op0, operands[0]))
2355 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0],
2356 gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (DImode,
2357 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code, DImode,
2358 op0, const0_rtx),
2359 const1_rtx,
2360 operands[0])));
2361 return 1;
2364 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (operands[0], op0))
2366 /* Handle the case where operands[0] == sparc_compare_op0.
2367 We "early clobber" the result. */
2368 op0 = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (sparc_compare_op0));
2369 emit_move_insn (op0, sparc_compare_op0);
2372 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0], const0_rtx));
2373 if (GET_MODE (op0) != DImode)
2375 temp = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
2376 convert_move (temp, op0, 0);
2378 else
2379 temp = op0;
2380 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0],
2381 gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (GET_MODE (operands[0]),
2382 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code, DImode,
2383 temp, const0_rtx),
2384 const1_rtx,
2385 operands[0])));
2386 return 1;
2388 else
2390 operands[1] = gen_compare_reg (compare_code, op0, op1);
2392 switch (GET_MODE (operands[1]))
2394 case CCmode :
2395 case CCXmode :
2396 case CCFPEmode :
2397 case CCFPmode :
2398 break;
2399 default :
2400 abort ();
2402 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0], const0_rtx));
2403 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0],
2404 gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (GET_MODE (operands[0]),
2405 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code,
2406 GET_MODE (operands[1]),
2407 operands[1], const0_rtx),
2408 const1_rtx, operands[0])));
2409 return 1;
2413 /* Emit a conditional jump insn for the v9 architecture using comparison code
2414 CODE and jump target LABEL.
2415 This function exists to take advantage of the v9 brxx insns. */
2417 void
2418 emit_v9_brxx_insn (code, op0, label)
2419 enum rtx_code code;
2420 rtx op0, label;
2422 emit_jump_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2423 pc_rtx,
2424 gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (VOIDmode,
2425 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code, GET_MODE (op0),
2426 op0, const0_rtx),
2427 gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (VOIDmode, label),
2428 pc_rtx)));
2431 /* Generate a DFmode part of a hard TFmode register.
2432 REG is the TFmode hard register, LOW is 1 for the
2433 low 64bit of the register and 0 otherwise.
2436 gen_df_reg (reg, low)
2437 rtx reg;
2438 int low;
2440 int regno = REGNO (reg);
2442 if ((WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN == 0) ^ (low != 0))
2443 regno += (TARGET_ARCH64 && regno < 32) ? 1 : 2;
2444 return gen_rtx_REG (DFmode, regno);
2447 /* Return nonzero if a return peephole merging return with
2448 setting of output register is ok. */
2450 leaf_return_peephole_ok ()
2452 return (actual_fsize == 0);
2455 /* Return nonzero if a branch/jump/call instruction will be emitting
2456 nop into its delay slot. */
2459 empty_delay_slot (insn)
2460 rtx insn;
2462 rtx seq;
2464 /* If no previous instruction (should not happen), return true. */
2465 if (PREV_INSN (insn) == NULL)
2466 return 1;
2468 seq = NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn));
2469 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (seq)) == SEQUENCE)
2470 return 0;
2472 return 1;
2475 /* Return nonzero if TRIAL can go into the function epilogue's
2476 delay slot. SLOT is the slot we are trying to fill. */
2479 eligible_for_epilogue_delay (trial, slot)
2480 rtx trial;
2481 int slot;
2483 rtx pat, src;
2485 if (slot >= 1)
2486 return 0;
2488 if (GET_CODE (trial) != INSN || GET_CODE (PATTERN (trial)) != SET)
2489 return 0;
2491 if (get_attr_length (trial) != 1)
2492 return 0;
2494 /* If there are any call-saved registers, we should scan TRIAL if it
2495 does not reference them. For now just make it easy. */
2496 if (num_gfregs)
2497 return 0;
2499 /* If the function uses __builtin_eh_return, the eh_return machinery
2500 occupies the delay slot. */
2501 if (current_function_calls_eh_return)
2502 return 0;
2504 /* In the case of a true leaf function, anything can go into the delay slot.
2505 A delay slot only exists however if the frame size is zero, otherwise
2506 we will put an insn to adjust the stack after the return. */
2507 if (current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs)
2509 if (leaf_return_peephole_ok ())
2510 return ((get_attr_in_uncond_branch_delay (trial)
2511 == IN_BRANCH_DELAY_TRUE));
2512 return 0;
2515 pat = PATTERN (trial);
2517 /* Otherwise, only operations which can be done in tandem with
2518 a `restore' or `return' insn can go into the delay slot. */
2519 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (pat)) != REG
2520 || REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) < 24)
2521 return 0;
2523 /* If this instruction sets up floating point register and we have a return
2524 instruction, it can probably go in. But restore will not work
2525 with FP_REGS. */
2526 if (REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) >= 32)
2528 if (TARGET_V9 && ! epilogue_renumber (&pat, 1)
2529 && (get_attr_in_uncond_branch_delay (trial) == IN_BRANCH_DELAY_TRUE))
2530 return 1;
2531 return 0;
2534 /* The set of insns matched here must agree precisely with the set of
2535 patterns paired with a RETURN in sparc.md. */
2537 src = SET_SRC (pat);
2539 /* This matches "*return_[qhs]i" or even "*return_di" on TARGET_ARCH64. */
2540 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT
2541 && arith_operand (src, GET_MODE (src)))
2543 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
2544 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode);
2545 else
2546 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (SImode);
2549 /* This matches "*return_di". */
2550 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT
2551 && arith_double_operand (src, GET_MODE (src)))
2552 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode);
2554 /* This matches "*return_sf_no_fpu". */
2555 else if (! TARGET_FPU && restore_operand (SET_DEST (pat), SFmode)
2556 && register_operand (src, SFmode))
2557 return 1;
2559 /* If we have return instruction, anything that does not use
2560 local or output registers and can go into a delay slot wins. */
2561 else if (TARGET_V9 && ! epilogue_renumber (&pat, 1)
2562 && (get_attr_in_uncond_branch_delay (trial) == IN_BRANCH_DELAY_TRUE))
2563 return 1;
2565 /* This matches "*return_addsi". */
2566 else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS
2567 && arith_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2568 && arith_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)
2569 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2570 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)))
2571 return 1;
2573 /* This matches "*return_adddi". */
2574 else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS
2575 && arith_double_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
2576 && arith_double_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)
2577 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
2578 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)))
2579 return 1;
2581 /* This can match "*return_losum_[sd]i".
2582 Catch only some cases, so that return_losum* don't have
2583 to be too big. */
2584 else if (GET_CODE (src) == LO_SUM
2585 && ! TARGET_CM_MEDMID
2586 && ((register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2587 && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode))
2588 || (TARGET_ARCH64
2589 && register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
2590 && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode))))
2591 return 1;
2593 /* sll{,x} reg,1,reg2 is add reg,reg,reg2 as well. */
2594 else if (GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFT
2595 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2596 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode))
2597 && XEXP (src, 1) == const1_rtx)
2598 return 1;
2600 return 0;
2603 /* Return nonzero if TRIAL can go into the sibling call
2604 delay slot. */
2607 eligible_for_sibcall_delay (trial)
2608 rtx trial;
2610 rtx pat, src;
2612 if (GET_CODE (trial) != INSN || GET_CODE (PATTERN (trial)) != SET)
2613 return 0;
2615 if (get_attr_length (trial) != 1)
2616 return 0;
2618 pat = PATTERN (trial);
2620 if (current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs)
2622 /* If the tail call is done using the call instruction,
2623 we have to restore %o7 in the delay slot. */
2624 if ((TARGET_ARCH64 && ! TARGET_CM_MEDLOW) || flag_pic)
2625 return 0;
2627 /* %g1 is used to build the function address */
2628 if (reg_mentioned_p (gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 1), pat))
2629 return 0;
2631 return 1;
2634 /* Otherwise, only operations which can be done in tandem with
2635 a `restore' insn can go into the delay slot. */
2636 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (pat)) != REG
2637 || REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) < 24
2638 || REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) >= 32)
2639 return 0;
2641 /* If it mentions %o7, it can't go in, because sibcall will clobber it
2642 in most cases. */
2643 if (reg_mentioned_p (gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 15), pat))
2644 return 0;
2646 src = SET_SRC (pat);
2648 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT
2649 && arith_operand (src, GET_MODE (src)))
2651 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
2652 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode);
2653 else
2654 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (SImode);
2657 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT
2658 && arith_double_operand (src, GET_MODE (src)))
2659 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode);
2661 else if (! TARGET_FPU && restore_operand (SET_DEST (pat), SFmode)
2662 && register_operand (src, SFmode))
2663 return 1;
2665 else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS
2666 && arith_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2667 && arith_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)
2668 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2669 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)))
2670 return 1;
2672 else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS
2673 && arith_double_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
2674 && arith_double_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)
2675 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
2676 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)))
2677 return 1;
2679 else if (GET_CODE (src) == LO_SUM
2680 && ! TARGET_CM_MEDMID
2681 && ((register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2682 && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode))
2683 || (TARGET_ARCH64
2684 && register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
2685 && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode))))
2686 return 1;
2688 else if (GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFT
2689 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2690 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode))
2691 && XEXP (src, 1) == const1_rtx)
2692 return 1;
2694 return 0;
2697 static int
2698 check_return_regs (x)
2699 rtx x;
2701 switch (GET_CODE (x))
2703 case REG:
2704 return IN_OR_GLOBAL_P (x);
2706 case CONST_INT:
2707 case CONST_DOUBLE:
2708 case CONST:
2709 case SYMBOL_REF:
2710 case LABEL_REF:
2711 return 1;
2713 case SET:
2714 case IOR:
2715 case AND:
2716 case XOR:
2717 case PLUS:
2718 case MINUS:
2719 if (check_return_regs (XEXP (x, 1)) == 0)
2720 return 0;
2721 case NOT:
2722 case NEG:
2723 case MEM:
2724 return check_return_regs (XEXP (x, 0));
2726 default:
2727 return 0;
2732 /* Return 1 if TRIAL references only in and global registers. */
2734 eligible_for_return_delay (trial)
2735 rtx trial;
2737 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (trial)) != SET)
2738 return 0;
2740 return check_return_regs (PATTERN (trial));
2744 short_branch (uid1, uid2)
2745 int uid1, uid2;
2747 int delta = INSN_ADDRESSES (uid1) - INSN_ADDRESSES (uid2);
2749 /* Leave a few words of "slop". */
2750 if (delta >= -1023 && delta <= 1022)
2751 return 1;
2753 return 0;
2756 /* Return non-zero if REG is not used after INSN.
2757 We assume REG is a reload reg, and therefore does
2758 not live past labels or calls or jumps. */
2760 reg_unused_after (reg, insn)
2761 rtx reg;
2762 rtx insn;
2764 enum rtx_code code, prev_code = UNKNOWN;
2766 while ((insn = NEXT_INSN (insn)))
2768 if (prev_code == CALL_INSN && call_used_regs[REGNO (reg)])
2769 return 1;
2771 code = GET_CODE (insn);
2772 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CODE_LABEL)
2773 return 1;
2775 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'i')
2777 rtx set = single_set (insn);
2778 int in_src = set && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, SET_SRC (set));
2779 if (set && in_src)
2780 return 0;
2781 if (set && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, SET_DEST (set)))
2782 return 1;
2783 if (set == 0 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, PATTERN (insn)))
2784 return 0;
2786 prev_code = code;
2788 return 1;
2791 /* The table we use to reference PIC data. */
2792 static rtx global_offset_table;
2794 /* The function we use to get at it. */
2795 static rtx get_pc_symbol;
2796 static char get_pc_symbol_name[256];
2798 /* Ensure that we are not using patterns that are not OK with PIC. */
2801 check_pic (i)
2802 int i;
2804 switch (flag_pic)
2806 case 1:
2807 if (GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]) == SYMBOL_REF
2808 || (GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]) == CONST
2809 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0)) == MINUS
2810 && (XEXP (XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0), 0)
2811 == global_offset_table)
2812 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0), 1))
2813 == CONST))))
2814 abort ();
2815 case 2:
2816 default:
2817 return 1;
2821 /* Return true if X is an address which needs a temporary register when
2822 reloaded while generating PIC code. */
2825 pic_address_needs_scratch (x)
2826 rtx x;
2828 /* An address which is a symbolic plus a non SMALL_INT needs a temp reg. */
2829 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
2830 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
2831 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
2832 && ! SMALL_INT (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)))
2833 return 1;
2835 return 0;
2838 /* Legitimize PIC addresses. If the address is already position-independent,
2839 we return ORIG. Newly generated position-independent addresses go into a
2840 reg. This is REG if non zero, otherwise we allocate register(s) as
2841 necessary. */
2844 legitimize_pic_address (orig, mode, reg)
2845 rtx orig;
2846 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
2847 rtx reg;
2849 if (GET_CODE (orig) == SYMBOL_REF)
2851 rtx pic_ref, address;
2852 rtx insn;
2854 if (reg == 0)
2856 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
2857 abort ();
2858 else
2859 reg = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
2862 if (flag_pic == 2)
2864 /* If not during reload, allocate another temp reg here for loading
2865 in the address, so that these instructions can be optimized
2866 properly. */
2867 rtx temp_reg = ((reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
2868 ? reg : gen_reg_rtx (Pmode));
2870 /* Must put the SYMBOL_REF inside an UNSPEC here so that cse
2871 won't get confused into thinking that these two instructions
2872 are loading in the true address of the symbol. If in the
2873 future a PIC rtx exists, that should be used instead. */
2874 if (Pmode == SImode)
2876 emit_insn (gen_movsi_high_pic (temp_reg, orig));
2877 emit_insn (gen_movsi_lo_sum_pic (temp_reg, temp_reg, orig));
2879 else
2881 emit_insn (gen_movdi_high_pic (temp_reg, orig));
2882 emit_insn (gen_movdi_lo_sum_pic (temp_reg, temp_reg, orig));
2884 address = temp_reg;
2886 else
2887 address = orig;
2889 pic_ref = gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode,
2890 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
2891 pic_offset_table_rtx, address));
2892 current_function_uses_pic_offset_table = 1;
2893 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (pic_ref) = 1;
2894 insn = emit_move_insn (reg, pic_ref);
2895 /* Put a REG_EQUAL note on this insn, so that it can be optimized
2896 by loop. */
2897 REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (REG_EQUAL, orig,
2898 REG_NOTES (insn));
2899 return reg;
2901 else if (GET_CODE (orig) == CONST)
2903 rtx base, offset;
2905 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (orig, 0)) == PLUS
2906 && XEXP (XEXP (orig, 0), 0) == pic_offset_table_rtx)
2907 return orig;
2909 if (reg == 0)
2911 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
2912 abort ();
2913 else
2914 reg = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
2917 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (orig, 0)) == PLUS)
2919 base = legitimize_pic_address (XEXP (XEXP (orig, 0), 0), Pmode, reg);
2920 offset = legitimize_pic_address (XEXP (XEXP (orig, 0), 1), Pmode,
2921 base == reg ? 0 : reg);
2923 else
2924 abort ();
2926 if (GET_CODE (offset) == CONST_INT)
2928 if (SMALL_INT (offset))
2929 return plus_constant (base, INTVAL (offset));
2930 else if (! reload_in_progress && ! reload_completed)
2931 offset = force_reg (Pmode, offset);
2932 else
2933 /* If we reach here, then something is seriously wrong. */
2934 abort ();
2936 return gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, base, offset);
2938 else if (GET_CODE (orig) == LABEL_REF)
2939 /* ??? Why do we do this? */
2940 /* Now movsi_pic_label_ref uses it, but we ought to be checking that
2941 the register is live instead, in case it is eliminated. */
2942 current_function_uses_pic_offset_table = 1;
2944 return orig;
2947 /* Emit special PIC prologues. */
2949 void
2950 load_pic_register ()
2952 /* Labels to get the PC in the prologue of this function. */
2953 int orig_flag_pic = flag_pic;
2955 if (! flag_pic)
2956 abort ();
2958 /* If we haven't emitted the special get_pc helper function, do so now. */
2959 if (get_pc_symbol_name[0] == 0)
2961 int align;
2963 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (get_pc_symbol_name, "LGETPC", 0);
2964 text_section ();
2966 align = floor_log2 (FUNCTION_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT);
2967 if (align > 0)
2968 ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (asm_out_file, align);
2969 ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (asm_out_file, "LGETPC", 0);
2970 fputs ("\tretl\n\tadd\t%o7, %l7, %l7\n", asm_out_file);
2973 /* Initialize every time through, since we can't easily
2974 know this to be permanent. */
2975 global_offset_table = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, "_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_");
2976 get_pc_symbol = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, get_pc_symbol_name);
2977 flag_pic = 0;
2979 emit_insn (gen_get_pc (pic_offset_table_rtx, global_offset_table,
2980 get_pc_symbol));
2982 flag_pic = orig_flag_pic;
2984 /* Need to emit this whether or not we obey regdecls,
2985 since setjmp/longjmp can cause life info to screw up.
2986 ??? In the case where we don't obey regdecls, this is not sufficient
2987 since we may not fall out the bottom. */
2988 emit_insn (gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, pic_offset_table_rtx));
2991 /* Return 1 if RTX is a MEM which is known to be aligned to at
2992 least a DESIRED byte boundary. */
2995 mem_min_alignment (mem, desired)
2996 rtx mem;
2997 int desired;
2999 rtx addr, base, offset;
3001 /* If it's not a MEM we can't accept it. */
3002 if (GET_CODE (mem) != MEM)
3003 return 0;
3005 addr = XEXP (mem, 0);
3006 base = offset = NULL_RTX;
3007 if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS)
3009 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG)
3011 base = XEXP (addr, 0);
3013 /* What we are saying here is that if the base
3014 REG is aligned properly, the compiler will make
3015 sure any REG based index upon it will be so
3016 as well. */
3017 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT)
3018 offset = XEXP (addr, 1);
3019 else
3020 offset = const0_rtx;
3023 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG)
3025 base = addr;
3026 offset = const0_rtx;
3029 if (base != NULL_RTX)
3031 int regno = REGNO (base);
3033 if (regno != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM && regno != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
3035 /* Check if the compiler has recorded some information
3036 about the alignment of the base REG. If reload has
3037 completed, we already matched with proper alignments.
3038 If not running global_alloc, reload might give us
3039 unaligned pointer to local stack though. */
3040 if (((cfun != 0
3041 && REGNO_POINTER_ALIGN (regno) >= desired * BITS_PER_UNIT)
3042 || (optimize && reload_completed))
3043 && (INTVAL (offset) & (desired - 1)) == 0)
3044 return 1;
3046 else
3048 if (((INTVAL (offset) - SPARC_STACK_BIAS) & (desired - 1)) == 0)
3049 return 1;
3052 else if (! TARGET_UNALIGNED_DOUBLES
3053 || CONSTANT_P (addr)
3054 || GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM)
3056 /* Anything else we know is properly aligned unless TARGET_UNALIGNED_DOUBLES
3057 is true, in which case we can only assume that an access is aligned if
3058 it is to a constant address, or the address involves a LO_SUM. */
3059 return 1;
3062 /* An obviously unaligned address. */
3063 return 0;
3067 /* Vectors to keep interesting information about registers where it can easily
3068 be got. We use to use the actual mode value as the bit number, but there
3069 are more than 32 modes now. Instead we use two tables: one indexed by
3070 hard register number, and one indexed by mode. */
3072 /* The purpose of sparc_mode_class is to shrink the range of modes so that
3073 they all fit (as bit numbers) in a 32 bit word (again). Each real mode is
3074 mapped into one sparc_mode_class mode. */
3076 enum sparc_mode_class {
3077 S_MODE, D_MODE, T_MODE, O_MODE,
3078 SF_MODE, DF_MODE, TF_MODE, OF_MODE,
3079 CC_MODE, CCFP_MODE
3082 /* Modes for single-word and smaller quantities. */
3083 #define S_MODES ((1 << (int) S_MODE) | (1 << (int) SF_MODE))
3085 /* Modes for double-word and smaller quantities. */
3086 #define D_MODES (S_MODES | (1 << (int) D_MODE) | (1 << DF_MODE))
3088 /* Modes for quad-word and smaller quantities. */
3089 #define T_MODES (D_MODES | (1 << (int) T_MODE) | (1 << (int) TF_MODE))
3091 /* Modes for 8-word and smaller quantities. */
3092 #define O_MODES (T_MODES | (1 << (int) O_MODE) | (1 << (int) OF_MODE))
3094 /* Modes for single-float quantities. We must allow any single word or
3095 smaller quantity. This is because the fix/float conversion instructions
3096 take integer inputs/outputs from the float registers. */
3097 #define SF_MODES (S_MODES)
3099 /* Modes for double-float and smaller quantities. */
3100 #define DF_MODES (S_MODES | D_MODES)
3102 /* Modes for double-float only quantities. */
3103 #define DF_MODES_NO_S ((1 << (int) D_MODE) | (1 << (int) DF_MODE))
3105 /* Modes for quad-float only quantities. */
3106 #define TF_ONLY_MODES (1 << (int) TF_MODE)
3108 /* Modes for quad-float and smaller quantities. */
3109 #define TF_MODES (DF_MODES | TF_ONLY_MODES)
3111 /* Modes for quad-float and double-float quantities. */
3112 #define TF_MODES_NO_S (DF_MODES_NO_S | TF_ONLY_MODES)
3114 /* Modes for quad-float pair only quantities. */
3115 #define OF_ONLY_MODES (1 << (int) OF_MODE)
3117 /* Modes for quad-float pairs and smaller quantities. */
3118 #define OF_MODES (TF_MODES | OF_ONLY_MODES)
3120 #define OF_MODES_NO_S (TF_MODES_NO_S | OF_ONLY_MODES)
3122 /* Modes for condition codes. */
3123 #define CC_MODES (1 << (int) CC_MODE)
3124 #define CCFP_MODES (1 << (int) CCFP_MODE)
3126 /* Value is 1 if register/mode pair is acceptable on sparc.
3127 The funny mixture of D and T modes is because integer operations
3128 do not specially operate on tetra quantities, so non-quad-aligned
3129 registers can hold quadword quantities (except %o4 and %i4 because
3130 they cross fixed registers). */
3132 /* This points to either the 32 bit or the 64 bit version. */
3133 const int *hard_regno_mode_classes;
3135 static const int hard_32bit_mode_classes[] = {
3136 S_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES,
3137 T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES,
3138 T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES,
3139 T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES,
3141 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3142 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3143 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3144 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, TF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3146 /* FP regs f32 to f63. Only the even numbered registers actually exist,
3147 and none can hold SFmode/SImode values. */
3148 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3149 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3150 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3151 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, TF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3153 /* %fcc[0123] */
3154 CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES,
3156 /* %icc */
3157 CC_MODES
3160 static const int hard_64bit_mode_classes[] = {
3161 D_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES,
3162 O_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES,
3163 T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES,
3164 O_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES,
3166 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3167 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3168 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3169 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, TF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3171 /* FP regs f32 to f63. Only the even numbered registers actually exist,
3172 and none can hold SFmode/SImode values. */
3173 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3174 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3175 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3176 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, TF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3178 /* %fcc[0123] */
3179 CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES,
3181 /* %icc */
3182 CC_MODES
3185 int sparc_mode_class [NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
3187 enum reg_class sparc_regno_reg_class[FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER];
3189 static void
3190 sparc_init_modes ()
3192 int i;
3194 for (i = 0; i < NUM_MACHINE_MODES; i++)
3196 switch (GET_MODE_CLASS (i))
3198 case MODE_INT:
3199 case MODE_PARTIAL_INT:
3200 case MODE_COMPLEX_INT:
3201 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) <= 4)
3202 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) S_MODE;
3203 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 8)
3204 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) D_MODE;
3205 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 16)
3206 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) T_MODE;
3207 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 32)
3208 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) O_MODE;
3209 else
3210 sparc_mode_class[i] = 0;
3211 break;
3212 case MODE_FLOAT:
3213 case MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT:
3214 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) <= 4)
3215 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) SF_MODE;
3216 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 8)
3217 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) DF_MODE;
3218 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 16)
3219 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) TF_MODE;
3220 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 32)
3221 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) OF_MODE;
3222 else
3223 sparc_mode_class[i] = 0;
3224 break;
3225 case MODE_CC:
3226 default:
3227 /* mode_class hasn't been initialized yet for EXTRA_CC_MODES, so
3228 we must explicitly check for them here. */
3229 if (i == (int) CCFPmode || i == (int) CCFPEmode)
3230 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) CCFP_MODE;
3231 else if (i == (int) CCmode || i == (int) CC_NOOVmode
3232 || i == (int) CCXmode || i == (int) CCX_NOOVmode)
3233 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) CC_MODE;
3234 else
3235 sparc_mode_class[i] = 0;
3236 break;
3240 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
3241 hard_regno_mode_classes = hard_64bit_mode_classes;
3242 else
3243 hard_regno_mode_classes = hard_32bit_mode_classes;
3245 /* Initialize the array used by REGNO_REG_CLASS. */
3246 for (i = 0; i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; i++)
3248 if (i < 16 && TARGET_V8PLUS)
3249 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = I64_REGS;
3250 else if (i < 32 || i == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)
3251 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = GENERAL_REGS;
3252 else if (i < 64)
3253 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = FP_REGS;
3254 else if (i < 96)
3255 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = EXTRA_FP_REGS;
3256 else if (i < 100)
3257 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = FPCC_REGS;
3258 else
3259 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = NO_REGS;
3263 /* Save non call used registers from LOW to HIGH at BASE+OFFSET.
3264 N_REGS is the number of 4-byte regs saved thus far. This applies even to
3265 v9 int regs as it simplifies the code. */
3267 static int
3268 save_regs (file, low, high, base, offset, n_regs, real_offset)
3269 FILE *file;
3270 int low, high;
3271 const char *base;
3272 int offset;
3273 int n_regs;
3274 int real_offset;
3276 int i;
3278 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && high <= 32)
3280 for (i = low; i < high; i++)
3282 if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
3284 fprintf (file, "\tstx\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
3285 reg_names[i], base, offset + 4 * n_regs);
3286 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
3287 dwarf2out_reg_save ("", i, real_offset + 4 * n_regs);
3288 n_regs += 2;
3292 else
3294 for (i = low; i < high; i += 2)
3296 if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
3298 if (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1])
3300 fprintf (file, "\tstd\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
3301 reg_names[i], base, offset + 4 * n_regs);
3302 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
3304 char *l = dwarf2out_cfi_label ();
3305 dwarf2out_reg_save (l, i, real_offset + 4 * n_regs);
3306 dwarf2out_reg_save (l, i+1, real_offset + 4 * n_regs + 4);
3308 n_regs += 2;
3310 else
3312 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
3313 reg_names[i], base, offset + 4 * n_regs);
3314 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
3315 dwarf2out_reg_save ("", i, real_offset + 4 * n_regs);
3316 n_regs += 2;
3319 else
3321 if (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1])
3323 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
3324 reg_names[i+1], base, offset + 4 * n_regs + 4);
3325 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
3326 dwarf2out_reg_save ("", i + 1, real_offset + 4 * n_regs + 4);
3327 n_regs += 2;
3332 return n_regs;
3335 /* Restore non call used registers from LOW to HIGH at BASE+OFFSET.
3337 N_REGS is the number of 4-byte regs saved thus far. This applies even to
3338 v9 int regs as it simplifies the code. */
3340 static int
3341 restore_regs (file, low, high, base, offset, n_regs)
3342 FILE *file;
3343 int low, high;
3344 const char *base;
3345 int offset;
3346 int n_regs;
3348 int i;
3350 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && high <= 32)
3352 for (i = low; i < high; i++)
3354 if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
3355 fprintf (file, "\tldx\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
3356 base, offset + 4 * n_regs, reg_names[i]),
3357 n_regs += 2;
3360 else
3362 for (i = low; i < high; i += 2)
3364 if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
3365 if (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1])
3366 fprintf (file, "\tldd\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
3367 base, offset + 4 * n_regs, reg_names[i]),
3368 n_regs += 2;
3369 else
3370 fprintf (file, "\tld\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
3371 base, offset + 4 * n_regs, reg_names[i]),
3372 n_regs += 2;
3373 else if (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1])
3374 fprintf (file, "\tld\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
3375 base, offset + 4 * n_regs + 4, reg_names[i+1]),
3376 n_regs += 2;
3379 return n_regs;
3382 /* Compute the frame size required by the function. This function is called
3383 during the reload pass and also by output_function_prologue(). */
3386 compute_frame_size (size, leaf_function)
3387 int size;
3388 int leaf_function;
3390 int n_regs = 0, i;
3391 int outgoing_args_size = (current_function_outgoing_args_size
3392 + REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (current_function_decl));
3394 /* N_REGS is the number of 4-byte regs saved thus far. This applies
3395 even to v9 int regs to be consistent with save_regs/restore_regs. */
3397 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
3399 for (i = 0; i < 8; i++)
3400 if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
3401 n_regs += 2;
3403 else
3405 for (i = 0; i < 8; i += 2)
3406 if ((regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
3407 || (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1]))
3408 n_regs += 2;
3411 for (i = 32; i < (TARGET_V9 ? 96 : 64); i += 2)
3412 if ((regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
3413 || (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1]))
3414 n_regs += 2;
3416 /* Set up values for use in `function_epilogue'. */
3417 num_gfregs = n_regs;
3419 if (leaf_function && n_regs == 0
3420 && size == 0 && current_function_outgoing_args_size == 0)
3422 actual_fsize = apparent_fsize = 0;
3424 else
3426 /* We subtract STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET, remember it's negative. */
3427 apparent_fsize = (size - STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET + 7) & -8;
3428 apparent_fsize += n_regs * 4;
3429 actual_fsize = apparent_fsize + ((outgoing_args_size + 7) & -8);
3432 /* Make sure nothing can clobber our register windows.
3433 If a SAVE must be done, or there is a stack-local variable,
3434 the register window area must be allocated.
3435 ??? For v8 we apparently need an additional 8 bytes of reserved space. */
3436 if (leaf_function == 0 || size > 0)
3437 actual_fsize += (16 * UNITS_PER_WORD) + (TARGET_ARCH64 ? 0 : 8);
3439 return SPARC_STACK_ALIGN (actual_fsize);
3442 /* Build a (32 bit) big number in a register. */
3443 /* ??? We may be able to use the set macro here too. */
3445 static void
3446 build_big_number (file, num, reg)
3447 FILE *file;
3448 int num;
3449 const char *reg;
3451 if (num >= 0 || ! TARGET_ARCH64)
3453 fprintf (file, "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %s\n", num, reg);
3454 if ((num & 0x3ff) != 0)
3455 fprintf (file, "\tor\t%s, %%lo(%d), %s\n", reg, num, reg);
3457 else /* num < 0 && TARGET_ARCH64 */
3459 /* Sethi does not sign extend, so we must use a little trickery
3460 to use it for negative numbers. Invert the constant before
3461 loading it in, then use xor immediate to invert the loaded bits
3462 (along with the upper 32 bits) to the desired constant. This
3463 works because the sethi and immediate fields overlap. */
3464 int asize = num;
3465 int inv = ~asize;
3466 int low = -0x400 + (asize & 0x3FF);
3468 fprintf (file, "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %s\n\txor\t%s, %d, %s\n",
3469 inv, reg, reg, low, reg);
3473 /* Output any necessary .register pseudo-ops. */
3474 void
3475 sparc_output_scratch_registers (file)
3476 FILE *file ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
3478 #ifdef HAVE_AS_REGISTER_PSEUDO_OP
3479 int i;
3481 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
3482 return;
3484 /* Check if %g[2367] were used without
3485 .register being printed for them already. */
3486 for (i = 2; i < 8; i++)
3488 if (regs_ever_live [i]
3489 && ! sparc_hard_reg_printed [i])
3491 sparc_hard_reg_printed [i] = 1;
3492 fprintf (file, "\t.register\t%%g%d, #scratch\n", i);
3494 if (i == 3) i = 5;
3496 #endif
3499 /* This function generates the assembly code for function entry.
3500 FILE is a stdio stream to output the code to.
3501 SIZE is an int: how many units of temporary storage to allocate.
3502 Refer to the array `regs_ever_live' to determine which registers
3503 to save; `regs_ever_live[I]' is nonzero if register number I
3504 is ever used in the function. This macro is responsible for
3505 knowing which registers should not be saved even if used. */
3507 /* On SPARC, move-double insns between fpu and cpu need an 8-byte block
3508 of memory. If any fpu reg is used in the function, we allocate
3509 such a block here, at the bottom of the frame, just in case it's needed.
3511 If this function is a leaf procedure, then we may choose not
3512 to do a "save" insn. The decision about whether or not
3513 to do this is made in regclass.c. */
3515 static void
3516 sparc_output_function_prologue (file, size)
3517 FILE *file;
3518 HOST_WIDE_INT size;
3520 if (TARGET_FLAT)
3521 sparc_flat_function_prologue (file, size);
3522 else
3523 sparc_nonflat_function_prologue (file, size,
3524 current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs);
3527 /* Output code for the function prologue. */
3529 static void
3530 sparc_nonflat_function_prologue (file, size, leaf_function)
3531 FILE *file;
3532 HOST_WIDE_INT size;
3533 int leaf_function;
3535 sparc_output_scratch_registers (file);
3537 /* Need to use actual_fsize, since we are also allocating
3538 space for our callee (and our own register save area). */
3539 actual_fsize = compute_frame_size (size, leaf_function);
3541 if (leaf_function)
3543 frame_base_name = "%sp";
3544 frame_base_offset = actual_fsize + SPARC_STACK_BIAS;
3546 else
3548 frame_base_name = "%fp";
3549 frame_base_offset = SPARC_STACK_BIAS;
3552 /* This is only for the human reader. */
3553 fprintf (file, "\t%s#PROLOGUE# 0\n", ASM_COMMENT_START);
3555 if (actual_fsize == 0)
3556 /* do nothing. */ ;
3557 else if (! leaf_function)
3559 if (actual_fsize <= 4096)
3560 fprintf (file, "\tsave\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", actual_fsize);
3561 else if (actual_fsize <= 8192)
3563 fprintf (file, "\tsave\t%%sp, -4096, %%sp\n");
3564 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", actual_fsize - 4096);
3566 else
3568 build_big_number (file, -actual_fsize, "%g1");
3569 fprintf (file, "\tsave\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n");
3572 else /* leaf function */
3574 if (actual_fsize <= 4096)
3575 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", actual_fsize);
3576 else if (actual_fsize <= 8192)
3578 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, -4096, %%sp\n");
3579 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", actual_fsize - 4096);
3581 else
3583 build_big_number (file, -actual_fsize, "%g1");
3584 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n");
3588 if (dwarf2out_do_frame () && actual_fsize)
3590 char *label = dwarf2out_cfi_label ();
3592 /* The canonical frame address refers to the top of the frame. */
3593 dwarf2out_def_cfa (label, (leaf_function ? STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
3594 : HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM),
3595 frame_base_offset);
3597 if (! leaf_function)
3599 /* Note the register window save. This tells the unwinder that
3600 it needs to restore the window registers from the previous
3601 frame's window save area at 0(cfa). */
3602 dwarf2out_window_save (label);
3604 /* The return address (-8) is now in %i7. */
3605 dwarf2out_return_reg (label, 31);
3609 /* If doing anything with PIC, do it now. */
3610 if (! flag_pic)
3611 fprintf (file, "\t%s#PROLOGUE# 1\n", ASM_COMMENT_START);
3613 /* Call saved registers are saved just above the outgoing argument area. */
3614 if (num_gfregs)
3616 int offset, real_offset, n_regs;
3617 const char *base;
3619 real_offset = -apparent_fsize;
3620 offset = -apparent_fsize + frame_base_offset;
3621 if (offset < -4096 || offset + num_gfregs * 4 > 4096)
3623 /* ??? This might be optimized a little as %g1 might already have a
3624 value close enough that a single add insn will do. */
3625 /* ??? Although, all of this is probably only a temporary fix
3626 because if %g1 can hold a function result, then
3627 output_function_epilogue will lose (the result will get
3628 clobbered). */
3629 build_big_number (file, offset, "%g1");
3630 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %%g1, %%g1\n", frame_base_name);
3631 base = "%g1";
3632 offset = 0;
3634 else
3636 base = frame_base_name;
3639 n_regs = save_regs (file, 0, 8, base, offset, 0, real_offset);
3640 save_regs (file, 32, TARGET_V9 ? 96 : 64, base, offset, n_regs,
3641 real_offset);
3645 /* Output code to restore any call saved registers. */
3647 static void
3648 output_restore_regs (file, leaf_function)
3649 FILE *file;
3650 int leaf_function ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
3652 int offset, n_regs;
3653 const char *base;
3655 offset = -apparent_fsize + frame_base_offset;
3656 if (offset < -4096 || offset + num_gfregs * 4 > 4096 - 8 /*double*/)
3658 build_big_number (file, offset, "%g1");
3659 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %%g1, %%g1\n", frame_base_name);
3660 base = "%g1";
3661 offset = 0;
3663 else
3665 base = frame_base_name;
3668 n_regs = restore_regs (file, 0, 8, base, offset, 0);
3669 restore_regs (file, 32, TARGET_V9 ? 96 : 64, base, offset, n_regs);
3672 /* This function generates the assembly code for function exit,
3673 on machines that need it.
3675 The function epilogue should not depend on the current stack pointer!
3676 It should use the frame pointer only. This is mandatory because
3677 of alloca; we also take advantage of it to omit stack adjustments
3678 before returning. */
3680 static void
3681 sparc_output_function_epilogue (file, size)
3682 FILE *file;
3683 HOST_WIDE_INT size;
3685 if (TARGET_FLAT)
3686 sparc_flat_function_epilogue (file, size);
3687 else
3688 sparc_nonflat_function_epilogue (file, size,
3689 current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs);
3692 /* Output code for the function epilogue. */
3694 static void
3695 sparc_nonflat_function_epilogue (file, size, leaf_function)
3696 FILE *file;
3697 HOST_WIDE_INT size ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
3698 int leaf_function;
3700 const char *ret;
3702 if (current_function_epilogue_delay_list == 0)
3704 /* If code does not drop into the epilogue, we need
3705 do nothing except output pending case vectors.
3707 We have to still output a dummy nop for the sake of
3708 sane backtraces. Otherwise, if the last two instructions
3709 of a function were call foo; dslot; this can make the return
3710 PC of foo (ie. address of call instruction plus 8) point to
3711 the first instruction in the next function. */
3712 rtx insn;
3714 fputs("\tnop\n", file);
3716 insn = get_last_insn ();
3717 if (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE)
3718 insn = prev_nonnote_insn (insn);
3719 if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == BARRIER)
3720 goto output_vectors;
3723 if (num_gfregs)
3724 output_restore_regs (file, leaf_function);
3726 /* Work out how to skip the caller's unimp instruction if required. */
3727 if (leaf_function)
3728 ret = (SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P ? "jmp\t%o7+12" : "retl");
3729 else
3730 ret = (SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P ? "jmp\t%i7+12" : "ret");
3732 if (! leaf_function)
3734 if (current_function_calls_eh_return)
3736 if (current_function_epilogue_delay_list)
3737 abort ();
3738 if (SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P)
3739 abort ();
3741 fputs ("\trestore\n\tretl\n\tadd\t%sp, %g1, %sp\n", file);
3743 /* If we wound up with things in our delay slot, flush them here. */
3744 else if (current_function_epilogue_delay_list)
3746 rtx delay = PATTERN (XEXP (current_function_epilogue_delay_list, 0));
3748 if (TARGET_V9 && ! epilogue_renumber (&delay, 1))
3750 epilogue_renumber (&delay, 0);
3751 fputs (SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P
3752 ? "\treturn\t%i7+12\n"
3753 : "\treturn\t%i7+8\n", file);
3754 final_scan_insn (XEXP (current_function_epilogue_delay_list, 0),
3755 file, 1, 0, 0);
3757 else
3759 rtx insn, src;
3761 if (GET_CODE (delay) != SET)
3762 abort();
3764 src = SET_SRC (delay);
3765 if (GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFT)
3767 if (XEXP (src, 1) != const1_rtx)
3768 abort();
3769 SET_SRC (delay)
3770 = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (src), XEXP (src, 0),
3771 XEXP (src, 0));
3774 insn = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode,
3775 gen_rtvec (2, delay,
3776 gen_rtx_RETURN (VOIDmode)));
3777 insn = emit_jump_insn (insn);
3779 sparc_emitting_epilogue = true;
3780 final_scan_insn (insn, file, 1, 0, 1);
3781 sparc_emitting_epilogue = false;
3784 else if (TARGET_V9 && ! SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P)
3785 fputs ("\treturn\t%i7+8\n\tnop\n", file);
3786 else
3787 fprintf (file, "\t%s\n\trestore\n", ret);
3789 /* All of the following cases are for leaf functions. */
3790 else if (current_function_calls_eh_return)
3791 abort ();
3792 else if (current_function_epilogue_delay_list)
3794 /* eligible_for_epilogue_delay_slot ensures that if this is a
3795 leaf function, then we will only have insn in the delay slot
3796 if the frame size is zero, thus no adjust for the stack is
3797 needed here. */
3798 if (actual_fsize != 0)
3799 abort ();
3800 fprintf (file, "\t%s\n", ret);
3801 final_scan_insn (XEXP (current_function_epilogue_delay_list, 0),
3802 file, 1, 0, 1);
3804 /* Output 'nop' instead of 'sub %sp,-0,%sp' when no frame, so as to
3805 avoid generating confusing assembly language output. */
3806 else if (actual_fsize == 0)
3807 fprintf (file, "\t%s\n\tnop\n", ret);
3808 else if (actual_fsize <= 4096)
3809 fprintf (file, "\t%s\n\tsub\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", ret, actual_fsize);
3810 else if (actual_fsize <= 8192)
3811 fprintf (file, "\tsub\t%%sp, -4096, %%sp\n\t%s\n\tsub\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n",
3812 ret, actual_fsize - 4096);
3813 else if ((actual_fsize & 0x3ff) == 0)
3814 fprintf (file, "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %%g1\n\t%s\n\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n",
3815 actual_fsize, ret);
3816 else
3817 fprintf (file, "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %%g1\n\tor\t%%g1, %%lo(%d), %%g1\n\t%s\n\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n",
3818 actual_fsize, actual_fsize, ret);
3820 output_vectors:
3821 sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors ();
3824 /* Output a sibling call. */
3826 const char *
3827 output_sibcall (insn, call_operand)
3828 rtx insn, call_operand;
3830 int leaf_regs = current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs;
3831 rtx operands[3];
3832 int delay_slot = dbr_sequence_length () > 0;
3834 if (num_gfregs)
3836 /* Call to restore global regs might clobber
3837 the delay slot. Instead of checking for this
3838 output the delay slot now. */
3839 if (delay_slot)
3841 rtx delay = NEXT_INSN (insn);
3843 if (! delay)
3844 abort ();
3846 final_scan_insn (delay, asm_out_file, 1, 0, 1);
3847 PATTERN (delay) = gen_blockage ();
3848 INSN_CODE (delay) = -1;
3849 delay_slot = 0;
3851 output_restore_regs (asm_out_file, leaf_regs);
3854 operands[0] = call_operand;
3856 if (leaf_regs)
3858 #ifdef HAVE_AS_RELAX_OPTION
3859 /* If as and ld are relaxing tail call insns into branch always,
3860 use or %o7,%g0,X; call Y; or X,%g0,%o7 always, so that it can
3861 be optimized. With sethi/jmpl as nor ld has no easy way how to
3862 find out if somebody does not branch between the sethi and jmpl. */
3863 int spare_slot = 0;
3864 #else
3865 int spare_slot = ((TARGET_ARCH32 || TARGET_CM_MEDLOW) && ! flag_pic);
3866 #endif
3867 int size = 0;
3869 if ((actual_fsize || ! spare_slot) && delay_slot)
3871 rtx delay = NEXT_INSN (insn);
3873 if (! delay)
3874 abort ();
3876 final_scan_insn (delay, asm_out_file, 1, 0, 1);
3877 PATTERN (delay) = gen_blockage ();
3878 INSN_CODE (delay) = -1;
3879 delay_slot = 0;
3881 if (actual_fsize)
3883 if (actual_fsize <= 4096)
3884 size = actual_fsize;
3885 else if (actual_fsize <= 8192)
3887 fputs ("\tsub\t%sp, -4096, %sp\n", asm_out_file);
3888 size = actual_fsize - 4096;
3890 else if ((actual_fsize & 0x3ff) == 0)
3891 fprintf (asm_out_file,
3892 "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %%g1\n\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n",
3893 actual_fsize);
3894 else
3896 fprintf (asm_out_file,
3897 "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %%g1\n\tor\t%%g1, %%lo(%d), %%g1\n",
3898 actual_fsize, actual_fsize);
3899 fputs ("\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n", asm_out_file);
3902 if (spare_slot)
3904 output_asm_insn ("sethi\t%%hi(%a0), %%g1", operands);
3905 output_asm_insn ("jmpl\t%%g1 + %%lo(%a0), %%g0", operands);
3906 if (size)
3907 fprintf (asm_out_file, "\t sub\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", size);
3908 else if (! delay_slot)
3909 fputs ("\t nop\n", asm_out_file);
3911 else
3913 if (size)
3914 fprintf (asm_out_file, "\tsub\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", size);
3915 /* Use or with rs2 %%g0 instead of mov, so that as/ld can optimize
3916 it into branch if possible. */
3917 output_asm_insn ("or\t%%o7, %%g0, %%g1", operands);
3918 output_asm_insn ("call\t%a0, 0", operands);
3919 output_asm_insn (" or\t%%g1, %%g0, %%o7", operands);
3921 return "";
3924 output_asm_insn ("call\t%a0, 0", operands);
3925 if (delay_slot)
3927 rtx delay = NEXT_INSN (insn), pat;
3929 if (! delay)
3930 abort ();
3932 pat = PATTERN (delay);
3933 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET)
3934 abort ();
3936 operands[0] = SET_DEST (pat);
3937 pat = SET_SRC (pat);
3938 switch (GET_CODE (pat))
3940 case PLUS:
3941 operands[1] = XEXP (pat, 0);
3942 operands[2] = XEXP (pat, 1);
3943 output_asm_insn (" restore %r1, %2, %Y0", operands);
3944 break;
3945 case LO_SUM:
3946 operands[1] = XEXP (pat, 0);
3947 operands[2] = XEXP (pat, 1);
3948 output_asm_insn (" restore %r1, %%lo(%a2), %Y0", operands);
3949 break;
3950 case ASHIFT:
3951 operands[1] = XEXP (pat, 0);
3952 output_asm_insn (" restore %r1, %r1, %Y0", operands);
3953 break;
3954 default:
3955 operands[1] = pat;
3956 output_asm_insn (" restore %%g0, %1, %Y0", operands);
3957 break;
3959 PATTERN (delay) = gen_blockage ();
3960 INSN_CODE (delay) = -1;
3962 else
3963 fputs ("\t restore\n", asm_out_file);
3964 return "";
3967 /* Functions for handling argument passing.
3969 For v8 the first six args are normally in registers and the rest are
3970 pushed. Any arg that starts within the first 6 words is at least
3971 partially passed in a register unless its data type forbids.
3973 For v9, the argument registers are laid out as an array of 16 elements
3974 and arguments are added sequentially. The first 6 int args and up to the
3975 first 16 fp args (depending on size) are passed in regs.
3977 Slot Stack Integral Float Float in structure Double Long Double
3978 ---- ----- -------- ----- ------------------ ------ -----------
3979 15 [SP+248] %f31 %f30,%f31 %d30
3980 14 [SP+240] %f29 %f28,%f29 %d28 %q28
3981 13 [SP+232] %f27 %f26,%f27 %d26
3982 12 [SP+224] %f25 %f24,%f25 %d24 %q24
3983 11 [SP+216] %f23 %f22,%f23 %d22
3984 10 [SP+208] %f21 %f20,%f21 %d20 %q20
3985 9 [SP+200] %f19 %f18,%f19 %d18
3986 8 [SP+192] %f17 %f16,%f17 %d16 %q16
3987 7 [SP+184] %f15 %f14,%f15 %d14
3988 6 [SP+176] %f13 %f12,%f13 %d12 %q12
3989 5 [SP+168] %o5 %f11 %f10,%f11 %d10
3990 4 [SP+160] %o4 %f9 %f8,%f9 %d8 %q8
3991 3 [SP+152] %o3 %f7 %f6,%f7 %d6
3992 2 [SP+144] %o2 %f5 %f4,%f5 %d4 %q4
3993 1 [SP+136] %o1 %f3 %f2,%f3 %d2
3994 0 [SP+128] %o0 %f1 %f0,%f1 %d0 %q0
3996 Here SP = %sp if -mno-stack-bias or %sp+stack_bias otherwise.
3998 Integral arguments are always passed as 64 bit quantities appropriately
3999 extended.
4001 Passing of floating point values is handled as follows.
4002 If a prototype is in scope:
4003 If the value is in a named argument (i.e. not a stdarg function or a
4004 value not part of the `...') then the value is passed in the appropriate
4005 fp reg.
4006 If the value is part of the `...' and is passed in one of the first 6
4007 slots then the value is passed in the appropriate int reg.
4008 If the value is part of the `...' and is not passed in one of the first 6
4009 slots then the value is passed in memory.
4010 If a prototype is not in scope:
4011 If the value is one of the first 6 arguments the value is passed in the
4012 appropriate integer reg and the appropriate fp reg.
4013 If the value is not one of the first 6 arguments the value is passed in
4014 the appropriate fp reg and in memory.
4017 /* Maximum number of int regs for args. */
4018 #define SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX 6
4019 /* Maximum number of fp regs for args. */
4020 #define SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX 16
4022 #define ROUND_ADVANCE(SIZE) (((SIZE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
4024 /* Handle the INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS macro.
4025 Initialize a variable CUM of type CUMULATIVE_ARGS
4026 for a call to a function whose data type is FNTYPE.
4027 For a library call, FNTYPE is 0. */
4029 void
4030 init_cumulative_args (cum, fntype, libname, indirect)
4031 CUMULATIVE_ARGS *cum;
4032 tree fntype;
4033 rtx libname ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
4034 int indirect ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
4036 cum->words = 0;
4037 cum->prototype_p = fntype && TYPE_ARG_TYPES (fntype);
4038 cum->libcall_p = fntype == 0;
4041 /* Compute the slot number to pass an argument in.
4042 Returns the slot number or -1 if passing on the stack.
4044 CUM is a variable of type CUMULATIVE_ARGS which gives info about
4045 the preceding args and about the function being called.
4046 MODE is the argument's machine mode.
4047 TYPE is the data type of the argument (as a tree).
4048 This is null for libcalls where that information may
4049 not be available.
4050 NAMED is nonzero if this argument is a named parameter
4051 (otherwise it is an extra parameter matching an ellipsis).
4052 INCOMING_P is zero for FUNCTION_ARG, nonzero for FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG.
4053 *PREGNO records the register number to use if scalar type.
4054 *PPADDING records the amount of padding needed in words. */
4056 static int
4057 function_arg_slotno (cum, mode, type, named, incoming_p, pregno, ppadding)
4058 const CUMULATIVE_ARGS *cum;
4059 enum machine_mode mode;
4060 tree type;
4061 int named;
4062 int incoming_p;
4063 int *pregno;
4064 int *ppadding;
4066 int regbase = (incoming_p
4067 ? SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST
4068 : SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST);
4069 int slotno = cum->words;
4070 int regno;
4072 *ppadding = 0;
4074 if (type != 0 && TREE_ADDRESSABLE (type))
4075 return -1;
4076 if (TARGET_ARCH32
4077 && type != 0 && mode == BLKmode
4078 && TYPE_ALIGN (type) % PARM_BOUNDARY != 0)
4079 return -1;
4081 switch (mode)
4083 case VOIDmode :
4084 /* MODE is VOIDmode when generating the actual call.
4085 See emit_call_1. */
4086 return -1;
4088 case QImode : case CQImode :
4089 case HImode : case CHImode :
4090 case SImode : case CSImode :
4091 case DImode : case CDImode :
4092 case TImode : case CTImode :
4093 if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
4094 return -1;
4095 regno = regbase + slotno;
4096 break;
4098 case SFmode : case SCmode :
4099 case DFmode : case DCmode :
4100 case TFmode : case TCmode :
4101 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
4103 if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
4104 return -1;
4105 regno = regbase + slotno;
4107 else
4109 if ((mode == TFmode || mode == TCmode)
4110 && (slotno & 1) != 0)
4111 slotno++, *ppadding = 1;
4112 if (TARGET_FPU && named)
4114 if (slotno >= SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX)
4115 return -1;
4116 regno = SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST + slotno * 2;
4117 if (mode == SFmode)
4118 regno++;
4120 else
4122 if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
4123 return -1;
4124 regno = regbase + slotno;
4127 break;
4129 case BLKmode :
4130 /* For sparc64, objects requiring 16 byte alignment get it. */
4131 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
4133 if (type && TYPE_ALIGN (type) == 128 && (slotno & 1) != 0)
4134 slotno++, *ppadding = 1;
4137 if (TARGET_ARCH32
4138 || (type && TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE))
4140 if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
4141 return -1;
4142 regno = regbase + slotno;
4144 else
4146 tree field;
4147 int intregs_p = 0, fpregs_p = 0;
4148 /* The ABI obviously doesn't specify how packed
4149 structures are passed. These are defined to be passed
4150 in int regs if possible, otherwise memory. */
4151 int packed_p = 0;
4153 /* First see what kinds of registers we need. */
4154 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
4156 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL)
4158 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == REAL_TYPE
4159 && TARGET_FPU)
4160 fpregs_p = 1;
4161 else
4162 intregs_p = 1;
4163 if (DECL_PACKED (field))
4164 packed_p = 1;
4167 if (packed_p || !named)
4168 fpregs_p = 0, intregs_p = 1;
4170 /* If all arg slots are filled, then must pass on stack. */
4171 if (fpregs_p && slotno >= SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX)
4172 return -1;
4173 /* If there are only int args and all int arg slots are filled,
4174 then must pass on stack. */
4175 if (!fpregs_p && intregs_p && slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
4176 return -1;
4177 /* Note that even if all int arg slots are filled, fp members may
4178 still be passed in regs if such regs are available.
4179 *PREGNO isn't set because there may be more than one, it's up
4180 to the caller to compute them. */
4181 return slotno;
4183 break;
4185 default :
4186 abort ();
4189 *pregno = regno;
4190 return slotno;
4193 /* Handle recursive register counting for structure field layout. */
4195 struct function_arg_record_value_parms
4197 rtx ret;
4198 int slotno, named, regbase;
4199 unsigned int nregs;
4200 int intoffset;
4203 static void function_arg_record_value_3
4204 PARAMS ((HOST_WIDE_INT, struct function_arg_record_value_parms *));
4205 static void function_arg_record_value_2
4206 PARAMS ((tree, HOST_WIDE_INT,
4207 struct function_arg_record_value_parms *));
4208 static void function_arg_record_value_1
4209 PARAMS ((tree, HOST_WIDE_INT,
4210 struct function_arg_record_value_parms *));
4211 static rtx function_arg_record_value
4212 PARAMS ((tree, enum machine_mode, int, int, int));
4214 /* A subroutine of function_arg_record_value. Traverse the structure
4215 recusively and determine how many registers will be required. */
4217 static void
4218 function_arg_record_value_1 (type, startbitpos, parms)
4219 tree type;
4220 HOST_WIDE_INT startbitpos;
4221 struct function_arg_record_value_parms *parms;
4223 tree field;
4225 /* The ABI obviously doesn't specify how packed structures are
4226 passed. These are defined to be passed in int regs if possible,
4227 otherwise memory. */
4228 int packed_p = 0;
4230 /* We need to compute how many registers are needed so we can
4231 allocate the PARALLEL but before we can do that we need to know
4232 whether there are any packed fields. If there are, int regs are
4233 used regardless of whether there are fp values present. */
4234 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
4236 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL && DECL_PACKED (field))
4238 packed_p = 1;
4239 break;
4243 /* Compute how many registers we need. */
4244 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
4246 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL)
4248 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos = startbitpos;
4250 if (DECL_SIZE (field) != 0
4251 && host_integerp (bit_position (field), 1))
4252 bitpos += int_bit_position (field);
4254 /* ??? FIXME: else assume zero offset. */
4256 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == RECORD_TYPE)
4257 function_arg_record_value_1 (TREE_TYPE (field), bitpos, parms);
4258 else if ((TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == REAL_TYPE
4259 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == COMPLEX_TYPE
4260 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (field)))
4261 == REAL_TYPE)))
4262 && TARGET_FPU
4263 && ! packed_p
4264 && parms->named)
4266 if (parms->intoffset != -1)
4268 int intslots, this_slotno;
4270 intslots = (bitpos - parms->intoffset + BITS_PER_WORD - 1)
4271 / BITS_PER_WORD;
4272 this_slotno = parms->slotno + parms->intoffset
4273 / BITS_PER_WORD;
4275 intslots = MIN (intslots, SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno);
4276 intslots = MAX (intslots, 0);
4277 parms->nregs += intslots;
4278 parms->intoffset = -1;
4281 /* There's no need to check this_slotno < SPARC_FP_ARG MAX.
4282 If it wasn't true we wouldn't be here. */
4283 parms->nregs += 1;
4284 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == COMPLEX_TYPE)
4285 parms->nregs += 1;
4287 else
4289 if (parms->intoffset == -1)
4290 parms->intoffset = bitpos;
4296 /* A subroutine of function_arg_record_value. Assign the bits of the
4297 structure between parms->intoffset and bitpos to integer registers. */
4299 static void
4300 function_arg_record_value_3 (bitpos, parms)
4301 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos;
4302 struct function_arg_record_value_parms *parms;
4304 enum machine_mode mode;
4305 unsigned int regno;
4306 unsigned int startbit, endbit;
4307 int this_slotno, intslots, intoffset;
4308 rtx reg;
4310 if (parms->intoffset == -1)
4311 return;
4313 intoffset = parms->intoffset;
4314 parms->intoffset = -1;
4316 startbit = intoffset & -BITS_PER_WORD;
4317 endbit = (bitpos + BITS_PER_WORD - 1) & -BITS_PER_WORD;
4318 intslots = (endbit - startbit) / BITS_PER_WORD;
4319 this_slotno = parms->slotno + intoffset / BITS_PER_WORD;
4321 intslots = MIN (intslots, SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno);
4322 if (intslots <= 0)
4323 return;
4325 /* If this is the trailing part of a word, only load that much into
4326 the register. Otherwise load the whole register. Note that in
4327 the latter case we may pick up unwanted bits. It's not a problem
4328 at the moment but may wish to revisit. */
4330 if (intoffset % BITS_PER_WORD != 0)
4331 mode = mode_for_size (BITS_PER_WORD - intoffset % BITS_PER_WORD,
4332 MODE_INT, 0);
4333 else
4334 mode = word_mode;
4336 intoffset /= BITS_PER_UNIT;
4339 regno = parms->regbase + this_slotno;
4340 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
4341 XVECEXP (parms->ret, 0, parms->nregs)
4342 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg, GEN_INT (intoffset));
4344 this_slotno += 1;
4345 intoffset = (intoffset | (UNITS_PER_WORD-1)) + 1;
4346 parms->nregs += 1;
4347 intslots -= 1;
4349 while (intslots > 0);
4352 /* A subroutine of function_arg_record_value. Traverse the structure
4353 recursively and assign bits to floating point registers. Track which
4354 bits in between need integer registers; invoke function_arg_record_value_3
4355 to make that happen. */
4357 static void
4358 function_arg_record_value_2 (type, startbitpos, parms)
4359 tree type;
4360 HOST_WIDE_INT startbitpos;
4361 struct function_arg_record_value_parms *parms;
4363 tree field;
4364 int packed_p = 0;
4366 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
4368 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL && DECL_PACKED (field))
4370 packed_p = 1;
4371 break;
4375 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
4377 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL)
4379 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos = startbitpos;
4381 if (DECL_SIZE (field) != 0
4382 && host_integerp (bit_position (field), 1))
4383 bitpos += int_bit_position (field);
4385 /* ??? FIXME: else assume zero offset. */
4387 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == RECORD_TYPE)
4388 function_arg_record_value_2 (TREE_TYPE (field), bitpos, parms);
4389 else if ((TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == REAL_TYPE
4390 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == COMPLEX_TYPE
4391 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (field)))
4392 == REAL_TYPE)))
4393 && TARGET_FPU
4394 && ! packed_p
4395 && parms->named)
4397 int this_slotno = parms->slotno + bitpos / BITS_PER_WORD;
4398 int regno;
4399 enum machine_mode mode = DECL_MODE (field);
4400 rtx reg;
4402 function_arg_record_value_3 (bitpos, parms);
4403 regno = SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST + this_slotno * 2
4404 + ((mode == SFmode || mode == SCmode)
4405 && (bitpos & 32) != 0);
4406 switch (mode)
4408 case SCmode: mode = SFmode; break;
4409 case DCmode: mode = DFmode; break;
4410 case TCmode: mode = TFmode; break;
4411 default: break;
4413 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
4414 XVECEXP (parms->ret, 0, parms->nregs)
4415 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg,
4416 GEN_INT (bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT));
4417 parms->nregs += 1;
4418 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == COMPLEX_TYPE)
4420 regno += GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / 4;
4421 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
4422 XVECEXP (parms->ret, 0, parms->nregs)
4423 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg,
4424 GEN_INT ((bitpos + GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
4425 / BITS_PER_UNIT));
4426 parms->nregs += 1;
4429 else
4431 if (parms->intoffset == -1)
4432 parms->intoffset = bitpos;
4438 /* Used by function_arg and function_value to implement the complex
4439 Sparc64 structure calling conventions. */
4441 static rtx
4442 function_arg_record_value (type, mode, slotno, named, regbase)
4443 tree type;
4444 enum machine_mode mode;
4445 int slotno, named, regbase;
4447 HOST_WIDE_INT typesize = int_size_in_bytes (type);
4448 struct function_arg_record_value_parms parms;
4449 unsigned int nregs;
4451 parms.ret = NULL_RTX;
4452 parms.slotno = slotno;
4453 parms.named = named;
4454 parms.regbase = regbase;
4456 /* Compute how many registers we need. */
4457 parms.nregs = 0;
4458 parms.intoffset = 0;
4459 function_arg_record_value_1 (type, 0, &parms);
4461 if (parms.intoffset != -1)
4463 unsigned int startbit, endbit;
4464 int intslots, this_slotno;
4466 startbit = parms.intoffset & -BITS_PER_WORD;
4467 endbit = (typesize*BITS_PER_UNIT + BITS_PER_WORD - 1) & -BITS_PER_WORD;
4468 intslots = (endbit - startbit) / BITS_PER_WORD;
4469 this_slotno = slotno + parms.intoffset / BITS_PER_WORD;
4471 intslots = MIN (intslots, SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno);
4472 intslots = MAX (intslots, 0);
4474 parms.nregs += intslots;
4476 nregs = parms.nregs;
4478 /* Allocate the vector and handle some annoying special cases. */
4479 if (nregs == 0)
4481 /* ??? Empty structure has no value? Duh? */
4482 if (typesize <= 0)
4484 /* Though there's nothing really to store, return a word register
4485 anyway so the rest of gcc doesn't go nuts. Returning a PARALLEL
4486 leads to breakage due to the fact that there are zero bytes to
4487 load. */
4488 return gen_rtx_REG (mode, regbase);
4490 else
4492 /* ??? C++ has structures with no fields, and yet a size. Give up
4493 for now and pass everything back in integer registers. */
4494 nregs = (typesize + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
4496 if (nregs + slotno > SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
4497 nregs = SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - slotno;
4499 if (nregs == 0)
4500 abort ();
4502 parms.ret = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode, rtvec_alloc (nregs));
4504 /* Fill in the entries. */
4505 parms.nregs = 0;
4506 parms.intoffset = 0;
4507 function_arg_record_value_2 (type, 0, &parms);
4508 function_arg_record_value_3 (typesize * BITS_PER_UNIT, &parms);
4510 if (parms.nregs != nregs)
4511 abort ();
4513 return parms.ret;
4516 /* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG macro.
4517 Determine where to put an argument to a function.
4518 Value is zero to push the argument on the stack,
4519 or a hard register in which to store the argument.
4521 CUM is a variable of type CUMULATIVE_ARGS which gives info about
4522 the preceding args and about the function being called.
4523 MODE is the argument's machine mode.
4524 TYPE is the data type of the argument (as a tree).
4525 This is null for libcalls where that information may
4526 not be available.
4527 NAMED is nonzero if this argument is a named parameter
4528 (otherwise it is an extra parameter matching an ellipsis).
4529 INCOMING_P is zero for FUNCTION_ARG, nonzero for FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG. */
4532 function_arg (cum, mode, type, named, incoming_p)
4533 const CUMULATIVE_ARGS *cum;
4534 enum machine_mode mode;
4535 tree type;
4536 int named;
4537 int incoming_p;
4539 int regbase = (incoming_p
4540 ? SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST
4541 : SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST);
4542 int slotno, regno, padding;
4543 rtx reg;
4545 slotno = function_arg_slotno (cum, mode, type, named, incoming_p,
4546 &regno, &padding);
4548 if (slotno == -1)
4549 return 0;
4551 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
4553 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
4554 return reg;
4557 /* v9 fp args in reg slots beyond the int reg slots get passed in regs
4558 but also have the slot allocated for them.
4559 If no prototype is in scope fp values in register slots get passed
4560 in two places, either fp regs and int regs or fp regs and memory. */
4561 if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT
4562 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT)
4563 && SPARC_FP_REG_P (regno))
4565 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
4566 if (cum->prototype_p || cum->libcall_p)
4568 /* "* 2" because fp reg numbers are recorded in 4 byte
4569 quantities. */
4570 #if 0
4571 /* ??? This will cause the value to be passed in the fp reg and
4572 in the stack. When a prototype exists we want to pass the
4573 value in the reg but reserve space on the stack. That's an
4574 optimization, and is deferred [for a bit]. */
4575 if ((regno - SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST) >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX * 2)
4576 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode,
4577 gen_rtvec (2,
4578 gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode,
4579 NULL_RTX, const0_rtx),
4580 gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode,
4581 reg, const0_rtx)));
4582 else
4583 #else
4584 /* ??? It seems that passing back a register even when past
4585 the area declared by REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE will allocate
4586 space appropriately, and will not copy the data onto the
4587 stack, exactly as we desire.
4589 This is due to locate_and_pad_parm being called in
4590 expand_call whenever reg_parm_stack_space > 0, which
4591 while benefical to our example here, would seem to be
4592 in error from what had been intended. Ho hum... -- r~ */
4593 #endif
4594 return reg;
4596 else
4598 rtx v0, v1;
4600 if ((regno - SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST) < SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX * 2)
4602 int intreg;
4604 /* On incoming, we don't need to know that the value
4605 is passed in %f0 and %i0, and it confuses other parts
4606 causing needless spillage even on the simplest cases. */
4607 if (incoming_p)
4608 return reg;
4610 intreg = (SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST
4611 + (regno - SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST) / 2);
4613 v0 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg, const0_rtx);
4614 v1 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, gen_rtx_REG (mode, intreg),
4615 const0_rtx);
4616 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode, gen_rtvec (2, v0, v1));
4618 else
4620 v0 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, NULL_RTX, const0_rtx);
4621 v1 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg, const0_rtx);
4622 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode, gen_rtvec (2, v0, v1));
4626 else if (type && TREE_CODE (type) == RECORD_TYPE)
4628 /* Structures up to 16 bytes in size are passed in arg slots on the
4629 stack and are promoted to registers where possible. */
4631 if (int_size_in_bytes (type) > 16)
4632 abort (); /* shouldn't get here */
4634 return function_arg_record_value (type, mode, slotno, named, regbase);
4636 else if (type && TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE)
4638 enum machine_mode mode;
4639 int bytes = int_size_in_bytes (type);
4641 if (bytes > 16)
4642 abort ();
4644 mode = mode_for_size (bytes * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 0);
4645 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
4647 else
4649 /* Scalar or complex int. */
4650 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
4653 return reg;
4656 /* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS macro.
4657 For an arg passed partly in registers and partly in memory,
4658 this is the number of registers used.
4659 For args passed entirely in registers or entirely in memory, zero.
4661 Any arg that starts in the first 6 regs but won't entirely fit in them
4662 needs partial registers on v8. On v9, structures with integer
4663 values in arg slots 5,6 will be passed in %o5 and SP+176, and complex fp
4664 values that begin in the last fp reg [where "last fp reg" varies with the
4665 mode] will be split between that reg and memory. */
4668 function_arg_partial_nregs (cum, mode, type, named)
4669 const CUMULATIVE_ARGS *cum;
4670 enum machine_mode mode;
4671 tree type;
4672 int named;
4674 int slotno, regno, padding;
4676 /* We pass 0 for incoming_p here, it doesn't matter. */
4677 slotno = function_arg_slotno (cum, mode, type, named, 0, &regno, &padding);
4679 if (slotno == -1)
4680 return 0;
4682 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
4684 if ((slotno + (mode == BLKmode
4685 ? ROUND_ADVANCE (int_size_in_bytes (type))
4686 : ROUND_ADVANCE (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))))
4687 > NPARM_REGS (SImode))
4688 return NPARM_REGS (SImode) - slotno;
4689 return 0;
4691 else
4693 if (type && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
4695 int size = int_size_in_bytes (type);
4696 int align = TYPE_ALIGN (type);
4698 if (align == 16)
4699 slotno += slotno & 1;
4700 if (size > 8 && size <= 16
4701 && slotno == SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - 1)
4702 return 1;
4704 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_INT
4705 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
4706 && ! TARGET_FPU))
4708 if (GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) == 128)
4710 slotno += slotno & 1;
4711 if (slotno == SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - 2)
4712 return 1;
4714 else
4716 if (slotno == SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - 1)
4717 return 1;
4720 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT)
4722 if (GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) == 128)
4723 slotno += slotno & 1;
4724 if ((slotno + GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
4725 > SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX)
4726 return 1;
4728 return 0;
4732 /* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE macro.
4733 !v9: The SPARC ABI stipulates passing struct arguments (of any size) and
4734 quad-precision floats by invisible reference.
4735 v9: Aggregates greater than 16 bytes are passed by reference.
4736 For Pascal, also pass arrays by reference. */
4739 function_arg_pass_by_reference (cum, mode, type, named)
4740 const CUMULATIVE_ARGS *cum ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
4741 enum machine_mode mode;
4742 tree type;
4743 int named ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
4745 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
4747 return ((type && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
4748 || mode == TFmode || mode == TCmode);
4750 else
4752 return ((type && TREE_CODE (type) == ARRAY_TYPE)
4753 /* Consider complex values as aggregates, so care for TCmode. */
4754 || GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > 16
4755 || (type
4756 && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type)
4757 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) int_size_in_bytes (type) > 16));
4761 /* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE macro.
4762 Update the data in CUM to advance over an argument
4763 of mode MODE and data type TYPE.
4764 TYPE is null for libcalls where that information may not be available. */
4766 void
4767 function_arg_advance (cum, mode, type, named)
4768 CUMULATIVE_ARGS *cum;
4769 enum machine_mode mode;
4770 tree type;
4771 int named;
4773 int slotno, regno, padding;
4775 /* We pass 0 for incoming_p here, it doesn't matter. */
4776 slotno = function_arg_slotno (cum, mode, type, named, 0, &regno, &padding);
4778 /* If register required leading padding, add it. */
4779 if (slotno != -1)
4780 cum->words += padding;
4782 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
4784 cum->words += (mode != BLKmode
4785 ? ROUND_ADVANCE (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
4786 : ROUND_ADVANCE (int_size_in_bytes (type)));
4788 else
4790 if (type && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
4792 int size = int_size_in_bytes (type);
4794 if (size <= 8)
4795 ++cum->words;
4796 else if (size <= 16)
4797 cum->words += 2;
4798 else /* passed by reference */
4799 ++cum->words;
4801 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_INT)
4803 cum->words += 2;
4805 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT)
4807 cum->words += GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
4809 else
4811 cum->words += (mode != BLKmode
4812 ? ROUND_ADVANCE (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
4813 : ROUND_ADVANCE (int_size_in_bytes (type)));
4818 /* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING macro.
4819 For the 64 bit ABI structs are always stored left shifted in their
4820 argument slot. */
4822 enum direction
4823 function_arg_padding (mode, type)
4824 enum machine_mode mode;
4825 tree type;
4827 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && type != 0 && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
4828 return upward;
4830 /* This is the default definition. */
4831 return (! BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
4832 ? upward
4833 : ((mode == BLKmode
4834 ? (type && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (type)) == INTEGER_CST
4835 && int_size_in_bytes (type) < (PARM_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT))
4836 : GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) < PARM_BOUNDARY)
4837 ? downward : upward));
4840 /* Handle FUNCTION_VALUE, FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE, and LIBCALL_VALUE macros.
4841 For v9, function return values are subject to the same rules as arguments,
4842 except that up to 32-bytes may be returned in registers. */
4845 function_value (type, mode, incoming_p)
4846 tree type;
4847 enum machine_mode mode;
4848 int incoming_p;
4850 int regno;
4851 int regbase = (incoming_p
4852 ? SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST
4853 : SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST);
4855 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && type)
4857 if (TREE_CODE (type) == RECORD_TYPE)
4859 /* Structures up to 32 bytes in size are passed in registers,
4860 promoted to fp registers where possible. */
4862 if (int_size_in_bytes (type) > 32)
4863 abort (); /* shouldn't get here */
4865 return function_arg_record_value (type, mode, 0, 1, regbase);
4867 else if (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
4869 /* All other aggregate types are passed in an integer register
4870 in a mode corresponding to the size of the type. */
4871 HOST_WIDE_INT bytes = int_size_in_bytes (type);
4873 if (bytes > 32)
4874 abort ();
4876 mode = mode_for_size (bytes * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 0);
4880 if (TARGET_ARCH64
4881 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
4882 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD
4883 && type && ! AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
4884 mode = DImode;
4886 if (incoming_p)
4887 regno = BASE_RETURN_VALUE_REG (mode);
4888 else
4889 regno = BASE_OUTGOING_VALUE_REG (mode);
4891 return gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
4894 /* Do what is necessary for `va_start'. We look at the current function
4895 to determine if stdarg or varargs is used and return the address of
4896 the first unnamed parameter. */
4899 sparc_builtin_saveregs ()
4901 int first_reg = current_function_args_info.words;
4902 rtx address;
4903 int regno;
4905 for (regno = first_reg; regno < NPARM_REGS (word_mode); regno++)
4906 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (word_mode,
4907 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
4908 frame_pointer_rtx,
4909 GEN_INT (FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (0)
4910 + (UNITS_PER_WORD
4911 * regno)))),
4912 gen_rtx_REG (word_mode,
4913 BASE_INCOMING_ARG_REG (word_mode) + regno));
4915 address = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
4916 frame_pointer_rtx,
4917 GEN_INT (FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (0)
4918 + UNITS_PER_WORD * first_reg));
4920 return address;
4923 /* Implement `va_start' for varargs and stdarg. */
4925 void
4926 sparc_va_start (stdarg_p, valist, nextarg)
4927 int stdarg_p ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
4928 tree valist;
4929 rtx nextarg;
4931 nextarg = expand_builtin_saveregs ();
4932 std_expand_builtin_va_start (1, valist, nextarg);
4935 /* Implement `va_arg'. */
4938 sparc_va_arg (valist, type)
4939 tree valist, type;
4941 HOST_WIDE_INT size, rsize, align;
4942 tree addr, incr;
4943 rtx addr_rtx;
4944 int indirect = 0;
4946 /* Round up sizeof(type) to a word. */
4947 size = int_size_in_bytes (type);
4948 rsize = (size + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) & -UNITS_PER_WORD;
4949 align = 0;
4951 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
4953 if (TYPE_ALIGN (type) >= 2 * (unsigned) BITS_PER_WORD)
4954 align = 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD;
4956 if (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
4958 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) size > 16)
4960 indirect = 1;
4961 size = rsize = UNITS_PER_WORD;
4963 /* SPARC v9 ABI states that structures up to 8 bytes in size are
4964 given one 8 byte slot. */
4965 else if (size == 0)
4966 size = rsize = UNITS_PER_WORD;
4967 else
4968 size = rsize;
4971 else
4973 if (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type)
4974 || TYPE_MODE (type) == TFmode
4975 || TYPE_MODE (type) == TCmode)
4977 indirect = 1;
4978 size = rsize = UNITS_PER_WORD;
4982 incr = valist;
4983 if (align)
4985 incr = fold (build (PLUS_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr,
4986 build_int_2 (align - 1, 0)));
4987 incr = fold (build (BIT_AND_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr,
4988 build_int_2 (-align, -1)));
4991 addr = incr = save_expr (incr);
4992 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && size < rsize)
4994 addr = fold (build (PLUS_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr,
4995 build_int_2 (rsize - size, 0)));
4997 incr = fold (build (PLUS_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr,
4998 build_int_2 (rsize, 0)));
5000 incr = build (MODIFY_EXPR, ptr_type_node, valist, incr);
5001 TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (incr) = 1;
5002 expand_expr (incr, const0_rtx, VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
5004 addr_rtx = expand_expr (addr, NULL, Pmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
5006 /* If the address isn't aligned properly for the type,
5007 we may need to copy to a temporary.
5008 FIXME: This is inefficient. Usually we can do this
5009 in registers. */
5010 if (align == 0
5011 && TYPE_ALIGN (type) > BITS_PER_WORD
5012 && !indirect)
5014 /* FIXME: We really need to specify that the temporary is live
5015 for the whole function because expand_builtin_va_arg wants
5016 the alias set to be get_varargs_alias_set (), but in this
5017 case the alias set is that for TYPE and if the memory gets
5018 reused it will be reused with alias set TYPE. */
5019 rtx tmp = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 0);
5020 rtx dest_addr;
5022 addr_rtx = force_reg (Pmode, addr_rtx);
5023 addr_rtx = gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode, addr_rtx);
5024 set_mem_alias_set (addr_rtx, get_varargs_alias_set ());
5025 set_mem_align (addr_rtx, BITS_PER_WORD);
5026 tmp = shallow_copy_rtx (tmp);
5027 PUT_MODE (tmp, BLKmode);
5028 set_mem_alias_set (tmp, 0);
5030 dest_addr = emit_block_move (tmp, addr_rtx, GEN_INT (rsize));
5031 if (dest_addr != NULL_RTX)
5032 addr_rtx = dest_addr;
5033 else
5034 addr_rtx = XCEXP (tmp, 0, MEM);
5037 if (indirect)
5039 addr_rtx = force_reg (Pmode, addr_rtx);
5040 addr_rtx = gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode, addr_rtx);
5041 set_mem_alias_set (addr_rtx, get_varargs_alias_set ());
5044 return addr_rtx;
5047 /* Return the string to output a conditional branch to LABEL, which is
5048 the operand number of the label. OP is the conditional expression.
5049 XEXP (OP, 0) is assumed to be a condition code register (integer or
5050 floating point) and its mode specifies what kind of comparison we made.
5052 REVERSED is non-zero if we should reverse the sense of the comparison.
5054 ANNUL is non-zero if we should generate an annulling branch.
5056 NOOP is non-zero if we have to follow this branch by a noop.
5058 INSN, if set, is the insn. */
5060 char *
5061 output_cbranch (op, dest, label, reversed, annul, noop, insn)
5062 rtx op, dest;
5063 int label;
5064 int reversed, annul, noop;
5065 rtx insn;
5067 static char string[50];
5068 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
5069 rtx cc_reg = XEXP (op, 0);
5070 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (cc_reg);
5071 const char *labelno, *branch;
5072 int spaces = 8, far;
5073 char *p;
5075 /* v9 branches are limited to +-1MB. If it is too far away,
5076 change
5078 bne,pt %xcc, .LC30
5082 be,pn %xcc, .+12
5084 ba .LC30
5088 fbne,a,pn %fcc2, .LC29
5092 fbe,pt %fcc2, .+16
5094 ba .LC29 */
5096 far = get_attr_length (insn) >= 3;
5097 if (reversed ^ far)
5099 /* Reversal of FP compares takes care -- an ordered compare
5100 becomes an unordered compare and vice versa. */
5101 if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode)
5102 code = reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (code);
5103 else
5104 code = reverse_condition (code);
5107 /* Start by writing the branch condition. */
5108 if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode)
5110 switch (code)
5112 case NE:
5113 branch = "fbne";
5114 break;
5115 case EQ:
5116 branch = "fbe";
5117 break;
5118 case GE:
5119 branch = "fbge";
5120 break;
5121 case GT:
5122 branch = "fbg";
5123 break;
5124 case LE:
5125 branch = "fble";
5126 break;
5127 case LT:
5128 branch = "fbl";
5129 break;
5130 case UNORDERED:
5131 branch = "fbu";
5132 break;
5133 case ORDERED:
5134 branch = "fbo";
5135 break;
5136 case UNGT:
5137 branch = "fbug";
5138 break;
5139 case UNLT:
5140 branch = "fbul";
5141 break;
5142 case UNEQ:
5143 branch = "fbue";
5144 break;
5145 case UNGE:
5146 branch = "fbuge";
5147 break;
5148 case UNLE:
5149 branch = "fbule";
5150 break;
5151 case LTGT:
5152 branch = "fblg";
5153 break;
5155 default:
5156 abort ();
5159 /* ??? !v9: FP branches cannot be preceded by another floating point
5160 insn. Because there is currently no concept of pre-delay slots,
5161 we can fix this only by always emitting a nop before a floating
5162 point branch. */
5164 string[0] = '\0';
5165 if (! TARGET_V9)
5166 strcpy (string, "nop\n\t");
5167 strcat (string, branch);
5169 else
5171 switch (code)
5173 case NE:
5174 branch = "bne";
5175 break;
5176 case EQ:
5177 branch = "be";
5178 break;
5179 case GE:
5180 if (mode == CC_NOOVmode || mode == CCX_NOOVmode)
5181 branch = "bpos";
5182 else
5183 branch = "bge";
5184 break;
5185 case GT:
5186 branch = "bg";
5187 break;
5188 case LE:
5189 branch = "ble";
5190 break;
5191 case LT:
5192 if (mode == CC_NOOVmode || mode == CCX_NOOVmode)
5193 branch = "bneg";
5194 else
5195 branch = "bl";
5196 break;
5197 case GEU:
5198 branch = "bgeu";
5199 break;
5200 case GTU:
5201 branch = "bgu";
5202 break;
5203 case LEU:
5204 branch = "bleu";
5205 break;
5206 case LTU:
5207 branch = "blu";
5208 break;
5210 default:
5211 abort ();
5213 strcpy (string, branch);
5215 spaces -= strlen (branch);
5216 p = strchr (string, '\0');
5218 /* Now add the annulling, the label, and a possible noop. */
5219 if (annul && ! far)
5221 strcpy (p, ",a");
5222 p += 2;
5223 spaces -= 2;
5226 if (! TARGET_V9)
5227 labelno = "";
5228 else
5230 rtx note;
5231 int v8 = 0;
5233 if (! far && insn && INSN_ADDRESSES_SET_P ())
5235 int delta = (INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (dest))
5236 - INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (insn)));
5237 /* Leave some instructions for "slop". */
5238 if (delta < -260000 || delta >= 260000)
5239 v8 = 1;
5242 if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode)
5244 static char v9_fcc_labelno[] = "%%fccX, ";
5245 /* Set the char indicating the number of the fcc reg to use. */
5246 v9_fcc_labelno[5] = REGNO (cc_reg) - SPARC_FIRST_V9_FCC_REG + '0';
5247 labelno = v9_fcc_labelno;
5248 if (v8)
5250 if (REGNO (cc_reg) == SPARC_FCC_REG)
5251 labelno = "";
5252 else
5253 abort ();
5256 else if (mode == CCXmode || mode == CCX_NOOVmode)
5258 labelno = "%%xcc, ";
5259 if (v8)
5260 abort ();
5262 else
5264 labelno = "%%icc, ";
5265 if (v8)
5266 labelno = "";
5269 if (*labelno && insn && (note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_BR_PROB, NULL_RTX)))
5271 strcpy (p,
5272 ((INTVAL (XEXP (note, 0)) >= REG_BR_PROB_BASE / 2) ^ far)
5273 ? ",pt" : ",pn");
5274 p += 3;
5275 spaces -= 3;
5278 if (spaces > 0)
5279 *p++ = '\t';
5280 else
5281 *p++ = ' ';
5282 strcpy (p, labelno);
5283 p = strchr (p, '\0');
5284 if (far)
5286 strcpy (p, ".+12\n\tnop\n\tb\t");
5287 if (annul || noop)
5288 p[3] = '6';
5289 p += 13;
5291 *p++ = '%';
5292 *p++ = 'l';
5293 /* Set the char indicating the number of the operand containing the
5294 label_ref. */
5295 *p++ = label + '0';
5296 *p = '\0';
5297 if (noop)
5298 strcpy (p, "\n\tnop");
5300 return string;
5303 /* Emit a library call comparison between floating point X and Y.
5304 COMPARISON is the rtl operator to compare with (EQ, NE, GT, etc.).
5305 TARGET_ARCH64 uses _Qp_* functions, which use pointers to TFmode
5306 values as arguments instead of the TFmode registers themselves,
5307 that's why we cannot call emit_float_lib_cmp. */
5308 void
5309 sparc_emit_float_lib_cmp (x, y, comparison)
5310 rtx x, y;
5311 enum rtx_code comparison;
5313 const char *qpfunc;
5314 rtx slot0, slot1, result, tem, tem2;
5315 enum machine_mode mode;
5317 switch (comparison)
5319 case EQ:
5320 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_feq" : "_Q_feq";
5321 break;
5323 case NE:
5324 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_fne" : "_Q_fne";
5325 break;
5327 case GT:
5328 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_fgt" : "_Q_fgt";
5329 break;
5331 case GE:
5332 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_fge" : "_Q_fge";
5333 break;
5335 case LT:
5336 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_flt" : "_Q_flt";
5337 break;
5339 case LE:
5340 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_fle" : "_Q_fle";
5341 break;
5343 case ORDERED:
5344 case UNORDERED:
5345 case UNGT:
5346 case UNLT:
5347 case UNEQ:
5348 case UNGE:
5349 case UNLE:
5350 case LTGT:
5351 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_cmp" : "_Q_cmp";
5352 break;
5354 default:
5355 abort();
5356 break;
5359 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
5361 if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
5363 slot0 = assign_stack_temp (TFmode, GET_MODE_SIZE(TFmode), 0);
5364 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, slot0, x));
5366 else
5367 slot0 = x;
5369 if (GET_CODE (y) != MEM)
5371 slot1 = assign_stack_temp (TFmode, GET_MODE_SIZE(TFmode), 0);
5372 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, slot1, y));
5374 else
5375 slot1 = y;
5377 emit_library_call (gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, qpfunc), 1,
5378 DImode, 2,
5379 XEXP (slot0, 0), Pmode,
5380 XEXP (slot1, 0), Pmode);
5382 mode = DImode;
5384 else
5386 emit_library_call (gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, qpfunc), 1,
5387 SImode, 2,
5388 x, TFmode, y, TFmode);
5390 mode = SImode;
5394 /* Immediately move the result of the libcall into a pseudo
5395 register so reload doesn't clobber the value if it needs
5396 the return register for a spill reg. */
5397 result = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
5398 emit_move_insn (result, hard_libcall_value (mode));
5400 switch (comparison)
5402 default:
5403 emit_cmp_insn (result, const0_rtx, NE, NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
5404 break;
5405 case ORDERED:
5406 case UNORDERED:
5407 emit_cmp_insn (result, GEN_INT(3), comparison == UNORDERED ? EQ : NE,
5408 NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
5409 break;
5410 case UNGT:
5411 case UNGE:
5412 emit_cmp_insn (result, const1_rtx,
5413 comparison == UNGT ? GT : NE, NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
5414 break;
5415 case UNLE:
5416 emit_cmp_insn (result, const2_rtx, NE, NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
5417 break;
5418 case UNLT:
5419 tem = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
5420 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
5421 emit_insn (gen_andsi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx));
5422 else
5423 emit_insn (gen_anddi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx));
5424 emit_cmp_insn (tem, const0_rtx, NE, NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
5425 break;
5426 case UNEQ:
5427 case LTGT:
5428 tem = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
5429 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
5430 emit_insn (gen_addsi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx));
5431 else
5432 emit_insn (gen_adddi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx));
5433 tem2 = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
5434 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
5435 emit_insn (gen_andsi3 (tem2, tem, const2_rtx));
5436 else
5437 emit_insn (gen_anddi3 (tem2, tem, const2_rtx));
5438 emit_cmp_insn (tem2, const0_rtx, comparison == UNEQ ? EQ : NE,
5439 NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
5440 break;
5444 /* Generate an unsigned DImode to FP conversion. This is the same code
5445 optabs would emit if we didn't have TFmode patterns. */
5447 void
5448 sparc_emit_floatunsdi (operands)
5449 rtx operands[2];
5451 rtx neglab, donelab, i0, i1, f0, in, out;
5452 enum machine_mode mode;
5454 out = operands[0];
5455 in = force_reg (DImode, operands[1]);
5456 mode = GET_MODE (out);
5457 neglab = gen_label_rtx ();
5458 donelab = gen_label_rtx ();
5459 i0 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
5460 i1 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
5461 f0 = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
5463 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (in, const0_rtx, LT, const0_rtx, DImode, 0, neglab);
5465 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, out, gen_rtx_FLOAT (mode, in)));
5466 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (donelab));
5467 emit_barrier ();
5469 emit_label (neglab);
5471 emit_insn (gen_lshrdi3 (i0, in, const1_rtx));
5472 emit_insn (gen_anddi3 (i1, in, const1_rtx));
5473 emit_insn (gen_iordi3 (i0, i0, i1));
5474 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, f0, gen_rtx_FLOAT (mode, i0)));
5475 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, out, gen_rtx_PLUS (mode, f0, f0)));
5477 emit_label (donelab);
5480 /* Return the string to output a conditional branch to LABEL, testing
5481 register REG. LABEL is the operand number of the label; REG is the
5482 operand number of the reg. OP is the conditional expression. The mode
5483 of REG says what kind of comparison we made.
5485 REVERSED is non-zero if we should reverse the sense of the comparison.
5487 ANNUL is non-zero if we should generate an annulling branch.
5489 NOOP is non-zero if we have to follow this branch by a noop. */
5491 char *
5492 output_v9branch (op, dest, reg, label, reversed, annul, noop, insn)
5493 rtx op, dest;
5494 int reg, label;
5495 int reversed, annul, noop;
5496 rtx insn;
5498 static char string[50];
5499 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
5500 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0));
5501 rtx note;
5502 int far;
5503 char *p;
5505 /* branch on register are limited to +-128KB. If it is too far away,
5506 change
5508 brnz,pt %g1, .LC30
5512 brz,pn %g1, .+12
5514 ba,pt %xcc, .LC30
5518 brgez,a,pn %o1, .LC29
5522 brlz,pt %o1, .+16
5524 ba,pt %xcc, .LC29 */
5526 far = get_attr_length (insn) >= 3;
5528 /* If not floating-point or if EQ or NE, we can just reverse the code. */
5529 if (reversed ^ far)
5530 code = reverse_condition (code);
5532 /* Only 64 bit versions of these instructions exist. */
5533 if (mode != DImode)
5534 abort ();
5536 /* Start by writing the branch condition. */
5538 switch (code)
5540 case NE:
5541 strcpy (string, "brnz");
5542 break;
5544 case EQ:
5545 strcpy (string, "brz");
5546 break;
5548 case GE:
5549 strcpy (string, "brgez");
5550 break;
5552 case LT:
5553 strcpy (string, "brlz");
5554 break;
5556 case LE:
5557 strcpy (string, "brlez");
5558 break;
5560 case GT:
5561 strcpy (string, "brgz");
5562 break;
5564 default:
5565 abort ();
5568 p = strchr (string, '\0');
5570 /* Now add the annulling, reg, label, and nop. */
5571 if (annul && ! far)
5573 strcpy (p, ",a");
5574 p += 2;
5577 if (insn && (note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_BR_PROB, NULL_RTX)))
5579 strcpy (p,
5580 ((INTVAL (XEXP (note, 0)) >= REG_BR_PROB_BASE / 2) ^ far)
5581 ? ",pt" : ",pn");
5582 p += 3;
5585 *p = p < string + 8 ? '\t' : ' ';
5586 p++;
5587 *p++ = '%';
5588 *p++ = '0' + reg;
5589 *p++ = ',';
5590 *p++ = ' ';
5591 if (far)
5593 int veryfar = 1, delta;
5595 if (INSN_ADDRESSES_SET_P ())
5597 delta = (INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (dest))
5598 - INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (insn)));
5599 /* Leave some instructions for "slop". */
5600 if (delta >= -260000 && delta < 260000)
5601 veryfar = 0;
5604 strcpy (p, ".+12\n\tnop\n\t");
5605 if (annul || noop)
5606 p[3] = '6';
5607 p += 11;
5608 if (veryfar)
5610 strcpy (p, "b\t");
5611 p += 2;
5613 else
5615 strcpy (p, "ba,pt\t%%xcc, ");
5616 p += 13;
5619 *p++ = '%';
5620 *p++ = 'l';
5621 *p++ = '0' + label;
5622 *p = '\0';
5624 if (noop)
5625 strcpy (p, "\n\tnop");
5627 return string;
5630 /* Return 1, if any of the registers of the instruction are %l[0-7] or %o[0-7].
5631 Such instructions cannot be used in the delay slot of return insn on v9.
5632 If TEST is 0, also rename all %i[0-7] registers to their %o[0-7] counterparts.
5635 static int
5636 epilogue_renumber (where, test)
5637 register rtx *where;
5638 int test;
5640 register const char *fmt;
5641 register int i;
5642 register enum rtx_code code;
5644 if (*where == 0)
5645 return 0;
5647 code = GET_CODE (*where);
5649 switch (code)
5651 case REG:
5652 if (REGNO (*where) >= 8 && REGNO (*where) < 24) /* oX or lX */
5653 return 1;
5654 if (! test && REGNO (*where) >= 24 && REGNO (*where) < 32)
5655 *where = gen_rtx (REG, GET_MODE (*where), OUTGOING_REGNO (REGNO(*where)));
5656 case SCRATCH:
5657 case CC0:
5658 case PC:
5659 case CONST_INT:
5660 case CONST_DOUBLE:
5661 return 0;
5663 /* Do not replace the frame pointer with the stack pointer because
5664 it can cause the delayed instruction to load below the stack.
5665 This occurs when instructions like:
5667 (set (reg/i:SI 24 %i0)
5668 (mem/f:SI (plus:SI (reg/f:SI 30 %fp)
5669 (const_int -20 [0xffffffec])) 0))
5671 are in the return delayed slot. */
5672 case PLUS:
5673 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (*where, 0)) == REG
5674 && REGNO (XEXP (*where, 0)) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
5675 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (*where, 1)) != CONST_INT
5676 || INTVAL (XEXP (*where, 1)) < SPARC_STACK_BIAS))
5677 return 1;
5678 break;
5680 case MEM:
5681 if (SPARC_STACK_BIAS
5682 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*where, 0)) == REG
5683 && REGNO (XEXP (*where, 0)) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)
5684 return 1;
5685 break;
5687 default:
5688 break;
5691 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
5693 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
5695 if (fmt[i] == 'E')
5697 register int j;
5698 for (j = XVECLEN (*where, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
5699 if (epilogue_renumber (&(XVECEXP (*where, i, j)), test))
5700 return 1;
5702 else if (fmt[i] == 'e'
5703 && epilogue_renumber (&(XEXP (*where, i)), test))
5704 return 1;
5706 return 0;
5709 /* Leaf functions and non-leaf functions have different needs. */
5711 static const int
5712 reg_leaf_alloc_order[] = REG_LEAF_ALLOC_ORDER;
5714 static const int
5715 reg_nonleaf_alloc_order[] = REG_ALLOC_ORDER;
5717 static const int *const reg_alloc_orders[] = {
5718 reg_leaf_alloc_order,
5719 reg_nonleaf_alloc_order};
5721 void
5722 order_regs_for_local_alloc ()
5724 static int last_order_nonleaf = 1;
5726 if (regs_ever_live[15] != last_order_nonleaf)
5728 last_order_nonleaf = !last_order_nonleaf;
5729 memcpy ((char *) reg_alloc_order,
5730 (const char *) reg_alloc_orders[last_order_nonleaf],
5731 FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof (int));
5735 /* Return 1 if REG and MEM are legitimate enough to allow the various
5736 mem<-->reg splits to be run. */
5739 sparc_splitdi_legitimate (reg, mem)
5740 rtx reg;
5741 rtx mem;
5743 /* Punt if we are here by mistake. */
5744 if (! reload_completed)
5745 abort ();
5747 /* We must have an offsettable memory reference. */
5748 if (! offsettable_memref_p (mem))
5749 return 0;
5751 /* If we have legitimate args for ldd/std, we do not want
5752 the split to happen. */
5753 if ((REGNO (reg) % 2) == 0
5754 && mem_min_alignment (mem, 8))
5755 return 0;
5757 /* Success. */
5758 return 1;
5761 /* Return 1 if x and y are some kind of REG and they refer to
5762 different hard registers. This test is guarenteed to be
5763 run after reload. */
5766 sparc_absnegfloat_split_legitimate (x, y)
5767 rtx x, y;
5769 if (GET_CODE (x) != REG)
5770 return 0;
5771 if (GET_CODE (y) != REG)
5772 return 0;
5773 if (REGNO (x) == REGNO (y))
5774 return 0;
5775 return 1;
5778 /* Return 1 if REGNO (reg1) is even and REGNO (reg1) == REGNO (reg2) - 1.
5779 This makes them candidates for using ldd and std insns.
5781 Note reg1 and reg2 *must* be hard registers. */
5784 registers_ok_for_ldd_peep (reg1, reg2)
5785 rtx reg1, reg2;
5787 /* We might have been passed a SUBREG. */
5788 if (GET_CODE (reg1) != REG || GET_CODE (reg2) != REG)
5789 return 0;
5791 if (REGNO (reg1) % 2 != 0)
5792 return 0;
5794 /* Integer ldd is deprecated in SPARC V9 */
5795 if (TARGET_V9 && REGNO (reg1) < 32)
5796 return 0;
5798 return (REGNO (reg1) == REGNO (reg2) - 1);
5801 /* Return 1 if the addresses in mem1 and mem2 are suitable for use in
5802 an ldd or std insn.
5804 This can only happen when addr1 and addr2, the addresses in mem1
5805 and mem2, are consecutive memory locations (addr1 + 4 == addr2).
5806 addr1 must also be aligned on a 64-bit boundary.
5808 Also iff dependent_reg_rtx is not null it should not be used to
5809 compute the address for mem1, i.e. we cannot optimize a sequence
5810 like:
5811 ld [%o0], %o0
5812 ld [%o0 + 4], %o1
5814 ldd [%o0], %o0
5815 nor:
5816 ld [%g3 + 4], %g3
5817 ld [%g3], %g2
5819 ldd [%g3], %g2
5821 But, note that the transformation from:
5822 ld [%g2 + 4], %g3
5823 ld [%g2], %g2
5825 ldd [%g2], %g2
5826 is perfectly fine. Thus, the peephole2 patterns always pass us
5827 the destination register of the first load, never the second one.
5829 For stores we don't have a similar problem, so dependent_reg_rtx is
5830 NULL_RTX. */
5833 mems_ok_for_ldd_peep (mem1, mem2, dependent_reg_rtx)
5834 rtx mem1, mem2, dependent_reg_rtx;
5836 rtx addr1, addr2;
5837 unsigned int reg1;
5838 int offset1;
5840 /* The mems cannot be volatile. */
5841 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (mem1) || MEM_VOLATILE_P (mem2))
5842 return 0;
5844 /* MEM1 should be aligned on a 64-bit boundary. */
5845 if (MEM_ALIGN (mem1) < 64)
5846 return 0;
5848 addr1 = XEXP (mem1, 0);
5849 addr2 = XEXP (mem2, 0);
5851 /* Extract a register number and offset (if used) from the first addr. */
5852 if (GET_CODE (addr1) == PLUS)
5854 /* If not a REG, return zero. */
5855 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr1, 0)) != REG)
5856 return 0;
5857 else
5859 reg1 = REGNO (XEXP (addr1, 0));
5860 /* The offset must be constant! */
5861 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr1, 1)) != CONST_INT)
5862 return 0;
5863 offset1 = INTVAL (XEXP (addr1, 1));
5866 else if (GET_CODE (addr1) != REG)
5867 return 0;
5868 else
5870 reg1 = REGNO (addr1);
5871 /* This was a simple (mem (reg)) expression. Offset is 0. */
5872 offset1 = 0;
5875 /* Make sure the second address is a (mem (plus (reg) (const_int). */
5876 if (GET_CODE (addr2) != PLUS)
5877 return 0;
5879 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr2, 0)) != REG
5880 || GET_CODE (XEXP (addr2, 1)) != CONST_INT)
5881 return 0;
5883 if (reg1 != REGNO (XEXP (addr2, 0)))
5884 return 0;
5886 if (dependent_reg_rtx != NULL_RTX && reg1 == REGNO (dependent_reg_rtx))
5887 return 0;
5889 /* The first offset must be evenly divisible by 8 to ensure the
5890 address is 64 bit aligned. */
5891 if (offset1 % 8 != 0)
5892 return 0;
5894 /* The offset for the second addr must be 4 more than the first addr. */
5895 if (INTVAL (XEXP (addr2, 1)) != offset1 + 4)
5896 return 0;
5898 /* All the tests passed. addr1 and addr2 are valid for ldd and std
5899 instructions. */
5900 return 1;
5903 /* Return 1 if reg is a pseudo, or is the first register in
5904 a hard register pair. This makes it a candidate for use in
5905 ldd and std insns. */
5908 register_ok_for_ldd (reg)
5909 rtx reg;
5911 /* We might have been passed a SUBREG. */
5912 if (GET_CODE (reg) != REG)
5913 return 0;
5915 if (REGNO (reg) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
5916 return (REGNO (reg) % 2 == 0);
5917 else
5918 return 1;
5921 /* Print operand X (an rtx) in assembler syntax to file FILE.
5922 CODE is a letter or dot (`z' in `%z0') or 0 if no letter was specified.
5923 For `%' followed by punctuation, CODE is the punctuation and X is null. */
5925 void
5926 print_operand (file, x, code)
5927 FILE *file;
5928 rtx x;
5929 int code;
5931 switch (code)
5933 case '#':
5934 /* Output a 'nop' if there's nothing for the delay slot. */
5935 if (dbr_sequence_length () == 0)
5936 fputs ("\n\t nop", file);
5937 return;
5938 case '*':
5939 /* Output an annul flag if there's nothing for the delay slot and we
5940 are optimizing. This is always used with '(' below. */
5941 /* Sun OS 4.1.1 dbx can't handle an annulled unconditional branch;
5942 this is a dbx bug. So, we only do this when optimizing. */
5943 /* On UltraSPARC, a branch in a delay slot causes a pipeline flush.
5944 Always emit a nop in case the next instruction is a branch. */
5945 if (dbr_sequence_length () == 0
5946 && (optimize && (int)sparc_cpu < PROCESSOR_V9))
5947 fputs (",a", file);
5948 return;
5949 case '(':
5950 /* Output a 'nop' if there's nothing for the delay slot and we are
5951 not optimizing. This is always used with '*' above. */
5952 if (dbr_sequence_length () == 0
5953 && ! (optimize && (int)sparc_cpu < PROCESSOR_V9))
5954 fputs ("\n\t nop", file);
5955 return;
5956 case '_':
5957 /* Output the Embedded Medium/Anywhere code model base register. */
5958 fputs (EMBMEDANY_BASE_REG, file);
5959 return;
5960 case '@':
5961 /* Print out what we are using as the frame pointer. This might
5962 be %fp, or might be %sp+offset. */
5963 /* ??? What if offset is too big? Perhaps the caller knows it isn't? */
5964 fprintf (file, "%s+%d", frame_base_name, frame_base_offset);
5965 return;
5966 case 'Y':
5967 /* Adjust the operand to take into account a RESTORE operation. */
5968 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT)
5969 break;
5970 else if (GET_CODE (x) != REG)
5971 output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%Y operand");
5972 else if (REGNO (x) < 8)
5973 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
5974 else if (REGNO (x) >= 24 && REGNO (x) < 32)
5975 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)-16], file);
5976 else
5977 output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%Y operand");
5978 return;
5979 case 'L':
5980 /* Print out the low order register name of a register pair. */
5981 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
5982 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+1], file);
5983 else
5984 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
5985 return;
5986 case 'H':
5987 /* Print out the high order register name of a register pair. */
5988 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
5989 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
5990 else
5991 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+1], file);
5992 return;
5993 case 'R':
5994 /* Print out the second register name of a register pair or quad.
5995 I.e., R (%o0) => %o1. */
5996 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+1], file);
5997 return;
5998 case 'S':
5999 /* Print out the third register name of a register quad.
6000 I.e., S (%o0) => %o2. */
6001 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+2], file);
6002 return;
6003 case 'T':
6004 /* Print out the fourth register name of a register quad.
6005 I.e., T (%o0) => %o3. */
6006 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+3], file);
6007 return;
6008 case 'x':
6009 /* Print a condition code register. */
6010 if (REGNO (x) == SPARC_ICC_REG)
6012 /* We don't handle CC[X]_NOOVmode because they're not supposed
6013 to occur here. */
6014 if (GET_MODE (x) == CCmode)
6015 fputs ("%icc", file);
6016 else if (GET_MODE (x) == CCXmode)
6017 fputs ("%xcc", file);
6018 else
6019 abort ();
6021 else
6022 /* %fccN register */
6023 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
6024 return;
6025 case 'm':
6026 /* Print the operand's address only. */
6027 output_address (XEXP (x, 0));
6028 return;
6029 case 'r':
6030 /* In this case we need a register. Use %g0 if the
6031 operand is const0_rtx. */
6032 if (x == const0_rtx
6033 || (GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode && x == CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (x))))
6035 fputs ("%g0", file);
6036 return;
6038 else
6039 break;
6041 case 'A':
6042 switch (GET_CODE (x))
6044 case IOR: fputs ("or", file); break;
6045 case AND: fputs ("and", file); break;
6046 case XOR: fputs ("xor", file); break;
6047 default: output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%A operand");
6049 return;
6051 case 'B':
6052 switch (GET_CODE (x))
6054 case IOR: fputs ("orn", file); break;
6055 case AND: fputs ("andn", file); break;
6056 case XOR: fputs ("xnor", file); break;
6057 default: output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%B operand");
6059 return;
6061 /* These are used by the conditional move instructions. */
6062 case 'c' :
6063 case 'C':
6065 enum rtx_code rc = GET_CODE (x);
6067 if (code == 'c')
6069 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0));
6070 if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode)
6071 rc = reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (GET_CODE (x));
6072 else
6073 rc = reverse_condition (GET_CODE (x));
6075 switch (rc)
6077 case NE: fputs ("ne", file); break;
6078 case EQ: fputs ("e", file); break;
6079 case GE: fputs ("ge", file); break;
6080 case GT: fputs ("g", file); break;
6081 case LE: fputs ("le", file); break;
6082 case LT: fputs ("l", file); break;
6083 case GEU: fputs ("geu", file); break;
6084 case GTU: fputs ("gu", file); break;
6085 case LEU: fputs ("leu", file); break;
6086 case LTU: fputs ("lu", file); break;
6087 case LTGT: fputs ("lg", file); break;
6088 case UNORDERED: fputs ("u", file); break;
6089 case ORDERED: fputs ("o", file); break;
6090 case UNLT: fputs ("ul", file); break;
6091 case UNLE: fputs ("ule", file); break;
6092 case UNGT: fputs ("ug", file); break;
6093 case UNGE: fputs ("uge", file); break;
6094 case UNEQ: fputs ("ue", file); break;
6095 default: output_operand_lossage (code == 'c'
6096 ? "invalid %%c operand"
6097 : "invalid %%C operand");
6099 return;
6102 /* These are used by the movr instruction pattern. */
6103 case 'd':
6104 case 'D':
6106 enum rtx_code rc = (code == 'd'
6107 ? reverse_condition (GET_CODE (x))
6108 : GET_CODE (x));
6109 switch (rc)
6111 case NE: fputs ("ne", file); break;
6112 case EQ: fputs ("e", file); break;
6113 case GE: fputs ("gez", file); break;
6114 case LT: fputs ("lz", file); break;
6115 case LE: fputs ("lez", file); break;
6116 case GT: fputs ("gz", file); break;
6117 default: output_operand_lossage (code == 'd'
6118 ? "invalid %%d operand"
6119 : "invalid %%D operand");
6121 return;
6124 case 'b':
6126 /* Print a sign-extended character. */
6127 int i = trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (x), QImode);
6128 fprintf (file, "%d", i);
6129 return;
6132 case 'f':
6133 /* Operand must be a MEM; write its address. */
6134 if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
6135 output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%f operand");
6136 output_address (XEXP (x, 0));
6137 return;
6139 case 0:
6140 /* Do nothing special. */
6141 break;
6143 default:
6144 /* Undocumented flag. */
6145 output_operand_lossage ("invalid operand output code");
6148 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
6149 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
6150 else if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
6152 fputc ('[', file);
6153 /* Poor Sun assembler doesn't understand absolute addressing. */
6154 if (CONSTANT_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
6155 fputs ("%g0+", file);
6156 output_address (XEXP (x, 0));
6157 fputc (']', file);
6159 else if (GET_CODE (x) == HIGH)
6161 fputs ("%hi(", file);
6162 output_addr_const (file, XEXP (x, 0));
6163 fputc (')', file);
6165 else if (GET_CODE (x) == LO_SUM)
6167 print_operand (file, XEXP (x, 0), 0);
6168 if (TARGET_CM_MEDMID)
6169 fputs ("+%l44(", file);
6170 else
6171 fputs ("+%lo(", file);
6172 output_addr_const (file, XEXP (x, 1));
6173 fputc (')', file);
6175 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE
6176 && (GET_MODE (x) == VOIDmode
6177 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_INT))
6179 if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (x) == 0)
6180 fprintf (file, "%u", (unsigned int) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x));
6181 else if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (x) == -1
6182 && CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x) < 0)
6183 fprintf (file, "%d", (int) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x));
6184 else
6185 output_operand_lossage ("long long constant not a valid immediate operand");
6187 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE)
6188 output_operand_lossage ("floating point constant not a valid immediate operand");
6189 else { output_addr_const (file, x); }
6192 /* Target hook for assembling integer objects. The sparc version has
6193 special handling for aligned DI-mode objects. */
6195 static bool
6196 sparc_assemble_integer (x, size, aligned_p)
6197 rtx x;
6198 unsigned int size;
6199 int aligned_p;
6201 /* ??? We only output .xword's for symbols and only then in environments
6202 where the assembler can handle them. */
6203 if (aligned_p && size == 8
6204 && (GET_CODE (x) != CONST_INT && GET_CODE (x) != CONST_DOUBLE))
6206 if (TARGET_V9)
6208 assemble_integer_with_op ("\t.xword\t", x);
6209 return true;
6211 else
6213 assemble_aligned_integer (4, const0_rtx);
6214 assemble_aligned_integer (4, x);
6215 return true;
6218 return default_assemble_integer (x, size, aligned_p);
6221 /* Return the value of a code used in the .proc pseudo-op that says
6222 what kind of result this function returns. For non-C types, we pick
6223 the closest C type. */
6225 #ifndef SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
6226 #define SHORT_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_UNIT * 2)
6227 #endif
6229 #ifndef INT_TYPE_SIZE
6230 #define INT_TYPE_SIZE BITS_PER_WORD
6231 #endif
6233 #ifndef LONG_TYPE_SIZE
6234 #define LONG_TYPE_SIZE BITS_PER_WORD
6235 #endif
6237 #ifndef LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
6238 #define LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_WORD * 2)
6239 #endif
6241 #ifndef FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
6242 #define FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE BITS_PER_WORD
6243 #endif
6245 #ifndef DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
6246 #define DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_WORD * 2)
6247 #endif
6249 #ifndef LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
6250 #define LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_WORD * 2)
6251 #endif
6253 unsigned long
6254 sparc_type_code (type)
6255 register tree type;
6257 register unsigned long qualifiers = 0;
6258 register unsigned shift;
6260 /* Only the first 30 bits of the qualifier are valid. We must refrain from
6261 setting more, since some assemblers will give an error for this. Also,
6262 we must be careful to avoid shifts of 32 bits or more to avoid getting
6263 unpredictable results. */
6265 for (shift = 6; shift < 30; shift += 2, type = TREE_TYPE (type))
6267 switch (TREE_CODE (type))
6269 case ERROR_MARK:
6270 return qualifiers;
6272 case ARRAY_TYPE:
6273 qualifiers |= (3 << shift);
6274 break;
6276 case FUNCTION_TYPE:
6277 case METHOD_TYPE:
6278 qualifiers |= (2 << shift);
6279 break;
6281 case POINTER_TYPE:
6282 case REFERENCE_TYPE:
6283 case OFFSET_TYPE:
6284 qualifiers |= (1 << shift);
6285 break;
6287 case RECORD_TYPE:
6288 return (qualifiers | 8);
6290 case UNION_TYPE:
6291 case QUAL_UNION_TYPE:
6292 return (qualifiers | 9);
6294 case ENUMERAL_TYPE:
6295 return (qualifiers | 10);
6297 case VOID_TYPE:
6298 return (qualifiers | 16);
6300 case INTEGER_TYPE:
6301 /* If this is a range type, consider it to be the underlying
6302 type. */
6303 if (TREE_TYPE (type) != 0)
6304 break;
6306 /* Carefully distinguish all the standard types of C,
6307 without messing up if the language is not C. We do this by
6308 testing TYPE_PRECISION and TREE_UNSIGNED. The old code used to
6309 look at both the names and the above fields, but that's redundant.
6310 Any type whose size is between two C types will be considered
6311 to be the wider of the two types. Also, we do not have a
6312 special code to use for "long long", so anything wider than
6313 long is treated the same. Note that we can't distinguish
6314 between "int" and "long" in this code if they are the same
6315 size, but that's fine, since neither can the assembler. */
6317 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) <= CHAR_TYPE_SIZE)
6318 return (qualifiers | (TREE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 12 : 2));
6320 else if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) <= SHORT_TYPE_SIZE)
6321 return (qualifiers | (TREE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 13 : 3));
6323 else if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) <= INT_TYPE_SIZE)
6324 return (qualifiers | (TREE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 14 : 4));
6326 else
6327 return (qualifiers | (TREE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 15 : 5));
6329 case REAL_TYPE:
6330 /* If this is a range type, consider it to be the underlying
6331 type. */
6332 if (TREE_TYPE (type) != 0)
6333 break;
6335 /* Carefully distinguish all the standard types of C,
6336 without messing up if the language is not C. */
6338 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) == FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE)
6339 return (qualifiers | 6);
6341 else
6342 return (qualifiers | 7);
6344 case COMPLEX_TYPE: /* GNU Fortran COMPLEX type. */
6345 /* ??? We need to distinguish between double and float complex types,
6346 but I don't know how yet because I can't reach this code from
6347 existing front-ends. */
6348 return (qualifiers | 7); /* Who knows? */
6350 case CHAR_TYPE: /* GNU Pascal CHAR type. Not used in C. */
6351 case BOOLEAN_TYPE: /* GNU Fortran BOOLEAN type. */
6352 case FILE_TYPE: /* GNU Pascal FILE type. */
6353 case SET_TYPE: /* GNU Pascal SET type. */
6354 case LANG_TYPE: /* ? */
6355 return qualifiers;
6357 default:
6358 abort (); /* Not a type! */
6362 return qualifiers;
6365 /* Nested function support. */
6367 /* Emit RTL insns to initialize the variable parts of a trampoline.
6368 FNADDR is an RTX for the address of the function's pure code.
6369 CXT is an RTX for the static chain value for the function.
6371 This takes 16 insns: 2 shifts & 2 ands (to split up addresses), 4 sethi
6372 (to load in opcodes), 4 iors (to merge address and opcodes), and 4 writes
6373 (to store insns). This is a bit excessive. Perhaps a different
6374 mechanism would be better here.
6376 Emit enough FLUSH insns to synchronize the data and instruction caches. */
6378 void
6379 sparc_initialize_trampoline (tramp, fnaddr, cxt)
6380 rtx tramp, fnaddr, cxt;
6382 /* SPARC 32 bit trampoline:
6384 sethi %hi(fn), %g1
6385 sethi %hi(static), %g2
6386 jmp %g1+%lo(fn)
6387 or %g2, %lo(static), %g2
6389 SETHI i,r = 00rr rrr1 00ii iiii iiii iiii iiii iiii
6390 JMPL r+i,d = 10dd ddd1 1100 0rrr rr1i iiii iiii iiii
6392 #ifdef TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
6393 emit_library_call (gen_rtx (SYMBOL_REF, Pmode, "__enable_execute_stack"),
6394 0, VOIDmode, 1, tramp, Pmode);
6395 #endif
6397 emit_move_insn
6398 (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 0)),
6399 expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab,
6400 expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, SImode, fnaddr,
6401 size_int (10), 0, 1),
6402 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x03000000, SImode)),
6403 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT));
6405 emit_move_insn
6406 (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 4)),
6407 expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab,
6408 expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, SImode, cxt,
6409 size_int (10), 0, 1),
6410 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x05000000, SImode)),
6411 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT));
6413 emit_move_insn
6414 (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 8)),
6415 expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab,
6416 expand_and (SImode, fnaddr, GEN_INT (0x3ff), NULL_RTX),
6417 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x81c06000, SImode)),
6418 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT));
6420 emit_move_insn
6421 (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 12)),
6422 expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab,
6423 expand_and (SImode, cxt, GEN_INT (0x3ff), NULL_RTX),
6424 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x8410a000, SImode)),
6425 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT));
6427 /* On UltraSPARC a flush flushes an entire cache line. The trampoline is
6428 aligned on a 16 byte boundary so one flush clears it all. */
6429 emit_insn (gen_flush (validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, tramp))));
6430 if (sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC)
6431 emit_insn (gen_flush (validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode,
6432 plus_constant (tramp, 8)))));
6435 /* The 64 bit version is simpler because it makes more sense to load the
6436 values as "immediate" data out of the trampoline. It's also easier since
6437 we can read the PC without clobbering a register. */
6439 void
6440 sparc64_initialize_trampoline (tramp, fnaddr, cxt)
6441 rtx tramp, fnaddr, cxt;
6443 #ifdef TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
6444 emit_library_call (gen_rtx (SYMBOL_REF, Pmode, "__enable_execute_stack"),
6445 0, VOIDmode, 1, tramp, Pmode);
6446 #endif
6449 rd %pc, %g1
6450 ldx [%g1+24], %g5
6451 jmp %g5
6452 ldx [%g1+16], %g5
6453 +16 bytes data
6456 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, tramp),
6457 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x83414000, SImode)));
6458 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 4)),
6459 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0xca586018, SImode)));
6460 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 8)),
6461 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x81c14000, SImode)));
6462 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 12)),
6463 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0xca586010, SImode)));
6464 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (DImode, plus_constant (tramp, 16)), cxt);
6465 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (DImode, plus_constant (tramp, 24)), fnaddr);
6466 emit_insn (gen_flushdi (validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (DImode, tramp))));
6468 if (sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC)
6469 emit_insn (gen_flushdi (validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (DImode, plus_constant (tramp, 8)))));
6472 /* Subroutines to support a flat (single) register window calling
6473 convention. */
6475 /* Single-register window sparc stack frames look like:
6477 Before call After call
6478 +-----------------------+ +-----------------------+
6479 high | | | |
6480 mem | caller's temps. | | caller's temps. |
6481 | | | |
6482 +-----------------------+ +-----------------------+
6483 | | | |
6484 | arguments on stack. | | arguments on stack. |
6485 | | | |
6486 +-----------------------+FP+92->+-----------------------+
6487 | 6 words to save | | 6 words to save |
6488 | arguments passed | | arguments passed |
6489 | in registers, even | | in registers, even |
6490 | if not passed. | | if not passed. |
6491 SP+68->+-----------------------+FP+68->+-----------------------+
6492 | 1 word struct addr | | 1 word struct addr |
6493 +-----------------------+FP+64->+-----------------------+
6494 | | | |
6495 | 16 word reg save area | | 16 word reg save area |
6496 | | | |
6497 SP->+-----------------------+ FP->+-----------------------+
6498 | 4 word area for |
6499 | fp/alu reg moves |
6500 FP-16->+-----------------------+
6502 | local variables |
6504 +-----------------------+
6506 | fp register save |
6508 +-----------------------+
6510 | gp register save |
6512 +-----------------------+
6514 | alloca allocations |
6516 +-----------------------+
6518 | arguments on stack |
6520 SP+92->+-----------------------+
6521 | 6 words to save |
6522 | arguments passed |
6523 | in registers, even |
6524 low | if not passed. |
6525 memory SP+68->+-----------------------+
6526 | 1 word struct addr |
6527 SP+64->+-----------------------+
6529 I 16 word reg save area |
6531 SP->+-----------------------+ */
6533 /* Structure to be filled in by sparc_flat_compute_frame_size with register
6534 save masks, and offsets for the current function. */
6536 struct sparc_frame_info
6538 unsigned long total_size; /* # bytes that the entire frame takes up. */
6539 unsigned long var_size; /* # bytes that variables take up. */
6540 unsigned long args_size; /* # bytes that outgoing arguments take up. */
6541 unsigned long extra_size; /* # bytes of extra gunk. */
6542 unsigned int gp_reg_size; /* # bytes needed to store gp regs. */
6543 unsigned int fp_reg_size; /* # bytes needed to store fp regs. */
6544 unsigned long gmask; /* Mask of saved gp registers. */
6545 unsigned long fmask; /* Mask of saved fp registers. */
6546 unsigned long reg_offset; /* Offset from new sp to store regs. */
6547 int initialized; /* Nonzero if frame size already calculated. */
6550 /* Current frame information calculated by sparc_flat_compute_frame_size. */
6551 struct sparc_frame_info current_frame_info;
6553 /* Zero structure to initialize current_frame_info. */
6554 struct sparc_frame_info zero_frame_info;
6556 /* Tell prologue and epilogue if register REGNO should be saved / restored. */
6558 #define RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM 15
6559 #define HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK (1 << (HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM))
6560 #define RETURN_ADDR_MASK (1 << (RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM))
6562 #define MUST_SAVE_REGISTER(regno) \
6563 ((regs_ever_live[regno] && !call_used_regs[regno]) \
6564 || (regno == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM && frame_pointer_needed) \
6565 || (regno == RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM && regs_ever_live[RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM]))
6567 /* Return the bytes needed to compute the frame pointer from the current
6568 stack pointer. */
6570 unsigned long
6571 sparc_flat_compute_frame_size (size)
6572 int size; /* # of var. bytes allocated. */
6574 int regno;
6575 unsigned long total_size; /* # bytes that the entire frame takes up. */
6576 unsigned long var_size; /* # bytes that variables take up. */
6577 unsigned long args_size; /* # bytes that outgoing arguments take up. */
6578 unsigned long extra_size; /* # extra bytes. */
6579 unsigned int gp_reg_size; /* # bytes needed to store gp regs. */
6580 unsigned int fp_reg_size; /* # bytes needed to store fp regs. */
6581 unsigned long gmask; /* Mask of saved gp registers. */
6582 unsigned long fmask; /* Mask of saved fp registers. */
6583 unsigned long reg_offset; /* Offset to register save area. */
6584 int need_aligned_p; /* 1 if need the save area 8 byte aligned. */
6586 /* This is the size of the 16 word reg save area, 1 word struct addr
6587 area, and 4 word fp/alu register copy area. */
6588 extra_size = -STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET + FIRST_PARM_OFFSET(0);
6589 var_size = size;
6590 gp_reg_size = 0;
6591 fp_reg_size = 0;
6592 gmask = 0;
6593 fmask = 0;
6594 reg_offset = 0;
6595 need_aligned_p = 0;
6597 args_size = 0;
6598 if (!leaf_function_p ())
6600 /* Also include the size needed for the 6 parameter registers. */
6601 args_size = current_function_outgoing_args_size + 24;
6603 total_size = var_size + args_size;
6605 /* Calculate space needed for gp registers. */
6606 for (regno = 1; regno <= 31; regno++)
6608 if (MUST_SAVE_REGISTER (regno))
6610 /* If we need to save two regs in a row, ensure there's room to bump
6611 up the address to align it to a doubleword boundary. */
6612 if ((regno & 0x1) == 0 && MUST_SAVE_REGISTER (regno+1))
6614 if (gp_reg_size % 8 != 0)
6615 gp_reg_size += 4;
6616 gp_reg_size += 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD;
6617 gmask |= 3 << regno;
6618 regno++;
6619 need_aligned_p = 1;
6621 else
6623 gp_reg_size += UNITS_PER_WORD;
6624 gmask |= 1 << regno;
6629 /* Calculate space needed for fp registers. */
6630 for (regno = 32; regno <= 63; regno++)
6632 if (regs_ever_live[regno] && !call_used_regs[regno])
6634 fp_reg_size += UNITS_PER_WORD;
6635 fmask |= 1 << (regno - 32);
6639 if (gmask || fmask)
6641 int n;
6642 reg_offset = FIRST_PARM_OFFSET(0) + args_size;
6643 /* Ensure save area is 8 byte aligned if we need it. */
6644 n = reg_offset % 8;
6645 if (need_aligned_p && n != 0)
6647 total_size += 8 - n;
6648 reg_offset += 8 - n;
6650 total_size += gp_reg_size + fp_reg_size;
6653 /* If we must allocate a stack frame at all, we must also allocate
6654 room for register window spillage, so as to be binary compatible
6655 with libraries and operating systems that do not use -mflat. */
6656 if (total_size > 0)
6657 total_size += extra_size;
6658 else
6659 extra_size = 0;
6661 total_size = SPARC_STACK_ALIGN (total_size);
6663 /* Save other computed information. */
6664 current_frame_info.total_size = total_size;
6665 current_frame_info.var_size = var_size;
6666 current_frame_info.args_size = args_size;
6667 current_frame_info.extra_size = extra_size;
6668 current_frame_info.gp_reg_size = gp_reg_size;
6669 current_frame_info.fp_reg_size = fp_reg_size;
6670 current_frame_info.gmask = gmask;
6671 current_frame_info.fmask = fmask;
6672 current_frame_info.reg_offset = reg_offset;
6673 current_frame_info.initialized = reload_completed;
6675 /* Ok, we're done. */
6676 return total_size;
6679 /* Save/restore registers in GMASK and FMASK at register BASE_REG plus offset
6680 OFFSET.
6682 BASE_REG must be 8 byte aligned. This allows us to test OFFSET for
6683 appropriate alignment and use DOUBLEWORD_OP when we can. We assume
6684 [BASE_REG+OFFSET] will always be a valid address.
6686 WORD_OP is either "st" for save, "ld" for restore.
6687 DOUBLEWORD_OP is either "std" for save, "ldd" for restore. */
6689 void
6690 sparc_flat_save_restore (file, base_reg, offset, gmask, fmask, word_op,
6691 doubleword_op, base_offset)
6692 FILE *file;
6693 const char *base_reg;
6694 unsigned int offset;
6695 unsigned long gmask;
6696 unsigned long fmask;
6697 const char *word_op;
6698 const char *doubleword_op;
6699 unsigned long base_offset;
6701 int regno;
6703 if (gmask == 0 && fmask == 0)
6704 return;
6706 /* Save registers starting from high to low. We've already saved the
6707 previous frame pointer and previous return address for the debugger's
6708 sake. The debugger allows us to not need a nop in the epilog if at least
6709 one register is reloaded in addition to return address. */
6711 if (gmask)
6713 for (regno = 1; regno <= 31; regno++)
6715 if ((gmask & (1L << regno)) != 0)
6717 if ((regno & 0x1) == 0 && ((gmask & (1L << (regno+1))) != 0))
6719 /* We can save two registers in a row. If we're not at a
6720 double word boundary, move to one.
6721 sparc_flat_compute_frame_size ensures there's room to do
6722 this. */
6723 if (offset % 8 != 0)
6724 offset += UNITS_PER_WORD;
6726 if (word_op[0] == 's')
6728 fprintf (file, "\t%s\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
6729 doubleword_op, reg_names[regno],
6730 base_reg, offset);
6731 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
6733 char *l = dwarf2out_cfi_label ();
6734 dwarf2out_reg_save (l, regno, offset + base_offset);
6735 dwarf2out_reg_save
6736 (l, regno+1, offset+base_offset + UNITS_PER_WORD);
6739 else
6740 fprintf (file, "\t%s\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
6741 doubleword_op, base_reg, offset,
6742 reg_names[regno]);
6744 offset += 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD;
6745 regno++;
6747 else
6749 if (word_op[0] == 's')
6751 fprintf (file, "\t%s\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
6752 word_op, reg_names[regno],
6753 base_reg, offset);
6754 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
6755 dwarf2out_reg_save ("", regno, offset + base_offset);
6757 else
6758 fprintf (file, "\t%s\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
6759 word_op, base_reg, offset, reg_names[regno]);
6761 offset += UNITS_PER_WORD;
6767 if (fmask)
6769 for (regno = 32; regno <= 63; regno++)
6771 if ((fmask & (1L << (regno - 32))) != 0)
6773 if (word_op[0] == 's')
6775 fprintf (file, "\t%s\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
6776 word_op, reg_names[regno],
6777 base_reg, offset);
6778 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
6779 dwarf2out_reg_save ("", regno, offset + base_offset);
6781 else
6782 fprintf (file, "\t%s\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
6783 word_op, base_reg, offset, reg_names[regno]);
6785 offset += UNITS_PER_WORD;
6791 /* Set up the stack and frame (if desired) for the function. */
6793 static void
6794 sparc_flat_function_prologue (file, size)
6795 FILE *file;
6796 HOST_WIDE_INT size;
6798 const char *sp_str = reg_names[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM];
6799 unsigned long gmask = current_frame_info.gmask;
6801 sparc_output_scratch_registers (file);
6803 /* This is only for the human reader. */
6804 fprintf (file, "\t%s#PROLOGUE# 0\n", ASM_COMMENT_START);
6805 fprintf (file, "\t%s# vars= %ld, regs= %d/%d, args= %d, extra= %ld\n",
6806 ASM_COMMENT_START,
6807 current_frame_info.var_size,
6808 current_frame_info.gp_reg_size / 4,
6809 current_frame_info.fp_reg_size / 4,
6810 current_function_outgoing_args_size,
6811 current_frame_info.extra_size);
6813 size = SPARC_STACK_ALIGN (size);
6814 size = (! current_frame_info.initialized
6815 ? sparc_flat_compute_frame_size (size)
6816 : current_frame_info.total_size);
6818 /* These cases shouldn't happen. Catch them now. */
6819 if (size == 0 && (gmask || current_frame_info.fmask))
6820 abort ();
6822 /* Allocate our stack frame by decrementing %sp.
6823 At present, the only algorithm gdb can use to determine if this is a
6824 flat frame is if we always set %i7 if we set %sp. This can be optimized
6825 in the future by putting in some sort of debugging information that says
6826 this is a `flat' function. However, there is still the case of debugging
6827 code without such debugging information (including cases where most fns
6828 have such info, but there is one that doesn't). So, always do this now
6829 so we don't get a lot of code out there that gdb can't handle.
6830 If the frame pointer isn't needn't then that's ok - gdb won't be able to
6831 distinguish us from a non-flat function but there won't (and shouldn't)
6832 be any differences anyway. The return pc is saved (if necessary) right
6833 after %i7 so gdb won't have to look too far to find it. */
6834 if (size > 0)
6836 unsigned int reg_offset = current_frame_info.reg_offset;
6837 const char *const fp_str = reg_names[HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM];
6838 static const char *const t1_str = "%g1";
6840 /* Things get a little tricky if local variables take up more than ~4096
6841 bytes and outgoing arguments take up more than ~4096 bytes. When that
6842 happens, the register save area can't be accessed from either end of
6843 the frame. Handle this by decrementing %sp to the start of the gp
6844 register save area, save the regs, update %i7, and then set %sp to its
6845 final value. Given that we only have one scratch register to play
6846 with it is the cheapest solution, and it helps gdb out as it won't
6847 slow down recognition of flat functions.
6848 Don't change the order of insns emitted here without checking with
6849 the gdb folk first. */
6851 /* Is the entire register save area offsettable from %sp? */
6852 if (reg_offset < 4096 - 64 * (unsigned) UNITS_PER_WORD)
6854 if (size <= 4096)
6856 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %d, %s\n",
6857 sp_str, (int) -size, sp_str);
6858 if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
6860 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
6861 fp_str, sp_str, reg_offset);
6862 fprintf (file, "\tsub\t%s, %d, %s\t%s# set up frame pointer\n",
6863 sp_str, (int) -size, fp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
6864 reg_offset += 4;
6867 else
6869 fprintf (file, "\tset\t");
6870 fprintf (file, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC, size);
6871 fprintf (file, ", %s\n\tsub\t%s, %s, %s\n",
6872 t1_str, sp_str, t1_str, sp_str);
6873 if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
6875 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
6876 fp_str, sp_str, reg_offset);
6877 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %s, %s\t%s# set up frame pointer\n",
6878 sp_str, t1_str, fp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
6879 reg_offset += 4;
6882 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
6884 char *l = dwarf2out_cfi_label ();
6885 if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
6887 dwarf2out_reg_save (l, HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM,
6888 reg_offset - 4 - size);
6889 dwarf2out_def_cfa (l, HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, 0);
6891 else
6892 dwarf2out_def_cfa (l, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM, size);
6894 if (gmask & RETURN_ADDR_MASK)
6896 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
6897 reg_names[RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM], sp_str, reg_offset);
6898 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
6899 dwarf2out_return_save ("", reg_offset - size);
6900 reg_offset += 4;
6902 sparc_flat_save_restore (file, sp_str, reg_offset,
6903 gmask & ~(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK | RETURN_ADDR_MASK),
6904 current_frame_info.fmask,
6905 "st", "std", -size);
6907 else
6909 /* Subtract %sp in two steps, but make sure there is always a
6910 64 byte register save area, and %sp is properly aligned. */
6911 /* Amount to decrement %sp by, the first time. */
6912 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT size1 = ((size - reg_offset + 64) + 15) & -16;
6913 /* Offset to register save area from %sp. */
6914 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT offset = size1 - (size - reg_offset);
6916 if (size1 <= 4096)
6918 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %d, %s\n",
6919 sp_str, (int) -size1, sp_str);
6920 if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
6922 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n\tsub\t%s, %d, %s\t%s# set up frame pointer\n",
6923 fp_str, sp_str, (int) offset, sp_str, (int) -size1,
6924 fp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
6925 offset += 4;
6928 else
6930 fprintf (file, "\tset\t");
6931 fprintf (file, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC, size1);
6932 fprintf (file, ", %s\n\tsub\t%s, %s, %s\n",
6933 t1_str, sp_str, t1_str, sp_str);
6934 if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
6936 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n\tadd\t%s, %s, %s\t%s# set up frame pointer\n",
6937 fp_str, sp_str, (int) offset, sp_str, t1_str,
6938 fp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
6939 offset += 4;
6942 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
6944 char *l = dwarf2out_cfi_label ();
6945 if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
6947 dwarf2out_reg_save (l, HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM,
6948 offset - 4 - size1);
6949 dwarf2out_def_cfa (l, HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, 0);
6951 else
6952 dwarf2out_def_cfa (l, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM, size1);
6954 if (gmask & RETURN_ADDR_MASK)
6956 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
6957 reg_names[RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM], sp_str, (int) offset);
6958 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
6959 /* offset - size1 == reg_offset - size
6960 if reg_offset were updated above like offset. */
6961 dwarf2out_return_save ("", offset - size1);
6962 offset += 4;
6964 sparc_flat_save_restore (file, sp_str, offset,
6965 gmask & ~(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK | RETURN_ADDR_MASK),
6966 current_frame_info.fmask,
6967 "st", "std", -size1);
6968 fprintf (file, "\tset\t");
6969 fprintf (file, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC, size - size1);
6970 fprintf (file, ", %s\n\tsub\t%s, %s, %s\n",
6971 t1_str, sp_str, t1_str, sp_str);
6972 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
6973 if (! (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK))
6974 dwarf2out_def_cfa ("", STACK_POINTER_REGNUM, size);
6978 fprintf (file, "\t%s#PROLOGUE# 1\n", ASM_COMMENT_START);
6981 /* Do any necessary cleanup after a function to restore stack, frame,
6982 and regs. */
6984 static void
6985 sparc_flat_function_epilogue (file, size)
6986 FILE *file;
6987 HOST_WIDE_INT size;
6989 rtx epilogue_delay = current_function_epilogue_delay_list;
6990 int noepilogue = FALSE;
6992 /* This is only for the human reader. */
6993 fprintf (file, "\t%s#EPILOGUE#\n", ASM_COMMENT_START);
6995 /* The epilogue does not depend on any registers, but the stack
6996 registers, so we assume that if we have 1 pending nop, it can be
6997 ignored, and 2 it must be filled (2 nops occur for integer
6998 multiply and divide). */
7000 size = SPARC_STACK_ALIGN (size);
7001 size = (!current_frame_info.initialized
7002 ? sparc_flat_compute_frame_size (size)
7003 : current_frame_info.total_size);
7005 if (size == 0 && epilogue_delay == 0)
7007 rtx insn = get_last_insn ();
7009 /* If the last insn was a BARRIER, we don't have to write any code
7010 because a jump (aka return) was put there. */
7011 if (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE)
7012 insn = prev_nonnote_insn (insn);
7013 if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == BARRIER)
7014 noepilogue = TRUE;
7017 if (!noepilogue)
7019 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT reg_offset = current_frame_info.reg_offset;
7020 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT size1;
7021 const char *const sp_str = reg_names[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM];
7022 const char *const fp_str = reg_names[HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM];
7023 static const char *const t1_str = "%g1";
7025 /* In the reload sequence, we don't need to fill the load delay
7026 slots for most of the loads, also see if we can fill the final
7027 delay slot if not otherwise filled by the reload sequence. */
7029 if (size > 4095)
7031 fprintf (file, "\tset\t");
7032 fprintf (file, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC, size);
7033 fprintf (file, ", %s\n", t1_str);
7036 if (frame_pointer_needed)
7038 if (size > 4095)
7039 fprintf (file,"\tsub\t%s, %s, %s\t\t%s# sp not trusted here\n",
7040 fp_str, t1_str, sp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
7041 else
7042 fprintf (file,"\tsub\t%s, %d, %s\t\t%s# sp not trusted here\n",
7043 fp_str, (int) size, sp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
7046 /* Is the entire register save area offsettable from %sp? */
7047 if (reg_offset < 4096 - 64 * (unsigned) UNITS_PER_WORD)
7049 size1 = 0;
7051 else
7053 /* Restore %sp in two steps, but make sure there is always a
7054 64 byte register save area, and %sp is properly aligned. */
7055 /* Amount to increment %sp by, the first time. */
7056 size1 = ((reg_offset - 64 - 16) + 15) & -16;
7057 /* Offset to register save area from %sp. */
7058 reg_offset = size1 - reg_offset;
7060 fprintf (file, "\tset\t");
7061 fprintf (file, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC, size1);
7062 fprintf (file, ", %s\n\tadd\t%s, %s, %s\n",
7063 t1_str, sp_str, t1_str, sp_str);
7066 /* We must restore the frame pointer and return address reg first
7067 because they are treated specially by the prologue output code. */
7068 if (current_frame_info.gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
7070 fprintf (file, "\tld\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
7071 sp_str, (int) reg_offset, fp_str);
7072 reg_offset += 4;
7074 if (current_frame_info.gmask & RETURN_ADDR_MASK)
7076 fprintf (file, "\tld\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
7077 sp_str, (int) reg_offset, reg_names[RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM]);
7078 reg_offset += 4;
7081 /* Restore any remaining saved registers. */
7082 sparc_flat_save_restore (file, sp_str, reg_offset,
7083 current_frame_info.gmask & ~(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK | RETURN_ADDR_MASK),
7084 current_frame_info.fmask,
7085 "ld", "ldd", 0);
7087 /* If we had to increment %sp in two steps, record it so the second
7088 restoration in the epilogue finishes up. */
7089 if (size1 > 0)
7091 size -= size1;
7092 if (size > 4095)
7094 fprintf (file, "\tset\t");
7095 fprintf (file, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC, size);
7096 fprintf (file, ", %s\n", t1_str);
7100 if (current_function_returns_struct)
7101 fprintf (file, "\tjmp\t%%o7+12\n");
7102 else
7103 fprintf (file, "\tretl\n");
7105 /* If the only register saved is the return address, we need a
7106 nop, unless we have an instruction to put into it. Otherwise
7107 we don't since reloading multiple registers doesn't reference
7108 the register being loaded. */
7110 if (epilogue_delay)
7112 if (size)
7113 abort ();
7114 final_scan_insn (XEXP (epilogue_delay, 0), file, 1, -2, 1);
7117 else if (size > 4095)
7118 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %s, %s\n", sp_str, t1_str, sp_str);
7120 else if (size > 0)
7121 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %d, %s\n", sp_str, (int) size, sp_str);
7123 else
7124 fprintf (file, "\tnop\n");
7127 /* Reset state info for each function. */
7128 current_frame_info = zero_frame_info;
7130 sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors ();
7133 /* Define the number of delay slots needed for the function epilogue.
7135 On the sparc, we need a slot if either no stack has been allocated,
7136 or the only register saved is the return register. */
7139 sparc_flat_epilogue_delay_slots ()
7141 if (!current_frame_info.initialized)
7142 (void) sparc_flat_compute_frame_size (get_frame_size ());
7144 if (current_frame_info.total_size == 0)
7145 return 1;
7147 return 0;
7150 /* Return true if TRIAL is a valid insn for the epilogue delay slot.
7151 Any single length instruction which doesn't reference the stack or frame
7152 pointer is OK. */
7155 sparc_flat_eligible_for_epilogue_delay (trial, slot)
7156 rtx trial;
7157 int slot ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7159 rtx pat = PATTERN (trial);
7161 if (get_attr_length (trial) != 1)
7162 return 0;
7164 if (! reg_mentioned_p (stack_pointer_rtx, pat)
7165 && ! reg_mentioned_p (frame_pointer_rtx, pat))
7166 return 1;
7168 return 0;
7171 /* Adjust the cost of a scheduling dependency. Return the new cost of
7172 a dependency LINK or INSN on DEP_INSN. COST is the current cost. */
7174 static int
7175 supersparc_adjust_cost (insn, link, dep_insn, cost)
7176 rtx insn;
7177 rtx link;
7178 rtx dep_insn;
7179 int cost;
7181 enum attr_type insn_type;
7183 if (! recog_memoized (insn))
7184 return 0;
7186 insn_type = get_attr_type (insn);
7188 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == 0)
7190 /* Data dependency; DEP_INSN writes a register that INSN reads some
7191 cycles later. */
7193 /* if a load, then the dependence must be on the memory address;
7194 add an extra "cycle". Note that the cost could be two cycles
7195 if the reg was written late in an instruction group; we ca not tell
7196 here. */
7197 if (insn_type == TYPE_LOAD || insn_type == TYPE_FPLOAD)
7198 return cost + 3;
7200 /* Get the delay only if the address of the store is the dependence. */
7201 if (insn_type == TYPE_STORE || insn_type == TYPE_FPSTORE)
7203 rtx pat = PATTERN(insn);
7204 rtx dep_pat = PATTERN (dep_insn);
7206 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (dep_pat) != SET)
7207 return cost; /* This should not happen! */
7209 /* The dependency between the two instructions was on the data that
7210 is being stored. Assume that this implies that the address of the
7211 store is not dependent. */
7212 if (rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (dep_pat), SET_SRC (pat)))
7213 return cost;
7215 return cost + 3; /* An approximation. */
7218 /* A shift instruction cannot receive its data from an instruction
7219 in the same cycle; add a one cycle penalty. */
7220 if (insn_type == TYPE_SHIFT)
7221 return cost + 3; /* Split before cascade into shift. */
7223 else
7225 /* Anti- or output- dependency; DEP_INSN reads/writes a register that
7226 INSN writes some cycles later. */
7228 /* These are only significant for the fpu unit; writing a fp reg before
7229 the fpu has finished with it stalls the processor. */
7231 /* Reusing an integer register causes no problems. */
7232 if (insn_type == TYPE_IALU || insn_type == TYPE_SHIFT)
7233 return 0;
7236 return cost;
7239 static int
7240 hypersparc_adjust_cost (insn, link, dep_insn, cost)
7241 rtx insn;
7242 rtx link;
7243 rtx dep_insn;
7244 int cost;
7246 enum attr_type insn_type, dep_type;
7247 rtx pat = PATTERN(insn);
7248 rtx dep_pat = PATTERN (dep_insn);
7250 if (recog_memoized (insn) < 0 || recog_memoized (dep_insn) < 0)
7251 return cost;
7253 insn_type = get_attr_type (insn);
7254 dep_type = get_attr_type (dep_insn);
7256 switch (REG_NOTE_KIND (link))
7258 case 0:
7259 /* Data dependency; DEP_INSN writes a register that INSN reads some
7260 cycles later. */
7262 switch (insn_type)
7264 case TYPE_STORE:
7265 case TYPE_FPSTORE:
7266 /* Get the delay iff the address of the store is the dependence. */
7267 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (dep_pat) != SET)
7268 return cost;
7270 if (rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (dep_pat), SET_SRC (pat)))
7271 return cost;
7272 return cost + 3;
7274 case TYPE_LOAD:
7275 case TYPE_SLOAD:
7276 case TYPE_FPLOAD:
7277 /* If a load, then the dependence must be on the memory address. If
7278 the addresses aren't equal, then it might be a false dependency */
7279 if (dep_type == TYPE_STORE || dep_type == TYPE_FPSTORE)
7281 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (dep_pat) != SET
7282 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (dep_pat)) != MEM
7283 || GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat)) != MEM
7284 || ! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_DEST (dep_pat), 0),
7285 XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 0)))
7286 return cost + 2;
7288 return cost + 8;
7290 break;
7292 case TYPE_BRANCH:
7293 /* Compare to branch latency is 0. There is no benefit from
7294 separating compare and branch. */
7295 if (dep_type == TYPE_COMPARE)
7296 return 0;
7297 /* Floating point compare to branch latency is less than
7298 compare to conditional move. */
7299 if (dep_type == TYPE_FPCMP)
7300 return cost - 1;
7301 break;
7302 default:
7303 break;
7305 break;
7307 case REG_DEP_ANTI:
7308 /* Anti-dependencies only penalize the fpu unit. */
7309 if (insn_type == TYPE_IALU || insn_type == TYPE_SHIFT)
7310 return 0;
7311 break;
7313 default:
7314 break;
7317 return cost;
7320 static int
7321 ultrasparc_adjust_cost (insn, link, dep_insn, cost)
7322 rtx insn;
7323 rtx link;
7324 rtx dep_insn;
7325 int cost;
7327 enum attr_type insn_type, dep_type;
7328 rtx pat = PATTERN(insn);
7329 rtx dep_pat = PATTERN (dep_insn);
7331 if (recog_memoized (insn) < 0 || recog_memoized (dep_insn) < 0)
7332 return cost;
7334 insn_type = get_attr_type (insn);
7335 dep_type = get_attr_type (dep_insn);
7337 /* Nothing issues in parallel with integer multiplies, so
7338 mark as zero cost since the scheduler can not do anything
7339 about it. */
7340 if (insn_type == TYPE_IMUL || insn_type == TYPE_IDIV)
7341 return 0;
7343 #define SLOW_FP(dep_type) \
7344 (dep_type == TYPE_FPSQRTS || dep_type == TYPE_FPSQRTD || \
7345 dep_type == TYPE_FPDIVS || dep_type == TYPE_FPDIVD)
7347 switch (REG_NOTE_KIND (link))
7349 case 0:
7350 /* Data dependency; DEP_INSN writes a register that INSN reads some
7351 cycles later. */
7353 if (dep_type == TYPE_CMOVE)
7355 /* Instructions that read the result of conditional moves cannot
7356 be in the same group or the following group. */
7357 return cost + 1;
7360 switch (insn_type)
7362 /* UltraSPARC can dual issue a store and an instruction setting
7363 the value stored, except for divide and square root. */
7364 case TYPE_FPSTORE:
7365 if (! SLOW_FP (dep_type))
7366 return 0;
7367 return cost;
7369 case TYPE_STORE:
7370 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (dep_pat) != SET)
7371 return cost;
7373 if (rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (dep_pat), SET_SRC (pat)))
7374 /* The dependency between the two instructions is on the data
7375 that is being stored. Assume that the address of the store
7376 is not also dependent. */
7377 return 0;
7378 return cost;
7380 case TYPE_LOAD:
7381 case TYPE_SLOAD:
7382 case TYPE_FPLOAD:
7383 /* A load does not return data until at least 11 cycles after
7384 a store to the same location. 3 cycles are accounted for
7385 in the load latency; add the other 8 here. */
7386 if (dep_type == TYPE_STORE || dep_type == TYPE_FPSTORE)
7388 /* If the addresses are not equal this may be a false
7389 dependency because pointer aliasing could not be
7390 determined. Add only 2 cycles in that case. 2 is
7391 an arbitrary compromise between 8, which would cause
7392 the scheduler to generate worse code elsewhere to
7393 compensate for a dependency which might not really
7394 exist, and 0. */
7395 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (dep_pat) != SET
7396 || GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat)) != MEM
7397 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (dep_pat)) != MEM
7398 || ! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 0),
7399 XEXP (SET_DEST (dep_pat), 0)))
7400 return cost + 2;
7402 return cost + 8;
7404 return cost;
7406 case TYPE_BRANCH:
7407 /* Compare to branch latency is 0. There is no benefit from
7408 separating compare and branch. */
7409 if (dep_type == TYPE_COMPARE)
7410 return 0;
7411 /* Floating point compare to branch latency is less than
7412 compare to conditional move. */
7413 if (dep_type == TYPE_FPCMP)
7414 return cost - 1;
7415 return cost;
7417 case TYPE_FPCMOVE:
7418 /* FMOVR class instructions can not issue in the same cycle
7419 or the cycle after an instruction which writes any
7420 integer register. Model this as cost 2 for dependent
7421 instructions. */
7422 if (dep_type == TYPE_IALU
7423 && cost < 2)
7424 return 2;
7425 /* Otherwise check as for integer conditional moves. */
7427 case TYPE_CMOVE:
7428 /* Conditional moves involving integer registers wait until
7429 3 cycles after loads return data. The interlock applies
7430 to all loads, not just dependent loads, but that is hard
7431 to model. */
7432 if (dep_type == TYPE_LOAD || dep_type == TYPE_SLOAD)
7433 return cost + 3;
7434 return cost;
7436 default:
7437 break;
7439 break;
7441 case REG_DEP_ANTI:
7442 /* Divide and square root lock destination registers for full latency. */
7443 if (! SLOW_FP (dep_type))
7444 return 0;
7445 break;
7447 case REG_DEP_OUTPUT:
7448 /* IEU and FPU instruction that have the same destination
7449 register cannot be grouped together. */
7450 return cost + 1;
7452 default:
7453 break;
7456 /* Other costs not accounted for:
7457 - Single precision floating point loads lock the other half of
7458 the even/odd register pair.
7459 - Several hazards associated with ldd/std are ignored because these
7460 instructions are rarely generated for V9.
7461 - The floating point pipeline can not have both a single and double
7462 precision operation active at the same time. Format conversions
7463 and graphics instructions are given honorary double precision status.
7464 - call and jmpl are always the first instruction in a group. */
7466 return cost;
7468 #undef SLOW_FP
7471 static int
7472 sparc_adjust_cost(insn, link, dep, cost)
7473 rtx insn;
7474 rtx link;
7475 rtx dep;
7476 int cost;
7478 switch (sparc_cpu)
7480 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
7481 cost = supersparc_adjust_cost (insn, link, dep, cost);
7482 break;
7483 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
7484 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
7485 cost = hypersparc_adjust_cost (insn, link, dep, cost);
7486 break;
7487 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
7488 cost = ultrasparc_adjust_cost (insn, link, dep, cost);
7489 break;
7490 default:
7491 break;
7493 return cost;
7496 /* This describes the state of the UltraSPARC pipeline during
7497 instruction scheduling. */
7499 #define TMASK(__x) ((unsigned)1 << ((int)(__x)))
7500 #define UMASK(__x) ((unsigned)1 << ((int)(__x)))
7502 enum ultra_code { NONE=0, /* no insn at all */
7503 IEU0, /* shifts and conditional moves */
7504 IEU1, /* condition code setting insns, calls+jumps */
7505 IEUN, /* all other single cycle ieu insns */
7506 LSU, /* loads and stores */
7507 CTI, /* branches */
7508 FPM, /* FPU pipeline 1, multiplies and divides */
7509 FPA, /* FPU pipeline 2, all other operations */
7510 SINGLE, /* single issue instructions */
7511 NUM_ULTRA_CODES };
7513 static enum ultra_code ultra_code_from_mask PARAMS ((int));
7514 static void ultra_schedule_insn PARAMS ((rtx *, rtx *, int, enum ultra_code));
7516 static const char *const ultra_code_names[NUM_ULTRA_CODES] = {
7517 "NONE", "IEU0", "IEU1", "IEUN", "LSU", "CTI",
7518 "FPM", "FPA", "SINGLE" };
7520 struct ultrasparc_pipeline_state {
7521 /* The insns in this group. */
7522 rtx group[4];
7524 /* The code for each insn. */
7525 enum ultra_code codes[4];
7527 /* Which insns in this group have been committed by the
7528 scheduler. This is how we determine how many more
7529 can issue this cycle. */
7530 char commit[4];
7532 /* How many insns in this group. */
7533 char group_size;
7535 /* Mask of free slots still in this group. */
7536 char free_slot_mask;
7538 /* The slotter uses the following to determine what other
7539 insn types can still make their way into this group. */
7540 char contents [NUM_ULTRA_CODES];
7541 char num_ieu_insns;
7544 #define ULTRA_NUM_HIST 8
7545 static struct ultrasparc_pipeline_state ultra_pipe_hist[ULTRA_NUM_HIST];
7546 static int ultra_cur_hist;
7547 static int ultra_cycles_elapsed;
7549 #define ultra_pipe (ultra_pipe_hist[ultra_cur_hist])
7551 /* Given TYPE_MASK compute the ultra_code it has. */
7552 static enum ultra_code
7553 ultra_code_from_mask (type_mask)
7554 int type_mask;
7556 if (type_mask & (TMASK (TYPE_SHIFT) | TMASK (TYPE_CMOVE)))
7557 return IEU0;
7558 else if (type_mask & (TMASK (TYPE_COMPARE) |
7559 TMASK (TYPE_CALL) |
7560 TMASK (TYPE_SIBCALL) |
7561 TMASK (TYPE_UNCOND_BRANCH)))
7562 return IEU1;
7563 else if (type_mask & TMASK (TYPE_IALU))
7564 return IEUN;
7565 else if (type_mask & (TMASK (TYPE_LOAD) | TMASK (TYPE_SLOAD) |
7566 TMASK (TYPE_STORE) | TMASK (TYPE_FPLOAD) |
7567 TMASK (TYPE_FPSTORE)))
7568 return LSU;
7569 else if (type_mask & (TMASK (TYPE_FPMUL) | TMASK (TYPE_FPDIVS) |
7570 TMASK (TYPE_FPDIVD) | TMASK (TYPE_FPSQRTS) |
7571 TMASK (TYPE_FPSQRTD)))
7572 return FPM;
7573 else if (type_mask & (TMASK (TYPE_FPMOVE) | TMASK (TYPE_FPCMOVE) |
7574 TMASK (TYPE_FP) | TMASK (TYPE_FPCMP)))
7575 return FPA;
7576 else if (type_mask & TMASK (TYPE_BRANCH))
7577 return CTI;
7579 return SINGLE;
7582 /* Check INSN (a conditional move) and make sure that it's
7583 results are available at this cycle. Return 1 if the
7584 results are in fact ready. */
7585 static int
7586 ultra_cmove_results_ready_p (insn)
7587 rtx insn;
7589 struct ultrasparc_pipeline_state *up;
7590 int entry, slot;
7592 /* If this got dispatched in the previous
7593 group, the results are not ready. */
7594 entry = (ultra_cur_hist - 1) & (ULTRA_NUM_HIST - 1);
7595 up = &ultra_pipe_hist[entry];
7596 slot = 4;
7597 while (--slot >= 0)
7598 if (up->group[slot] == insn)
7599 return 0;
7601 return 1;
7604 /* Walk backwards in pipeline history looking for FPU
7605 operations which use a mode different than FPMODE and
7606 will create a stall if an insn using FPMODE were to be
7607 dispatched this cycle. */
7608 static int
7609 ultra_fpmode_conflict_exists (fpmode)
7610 enum machine_mode fpmode;
7612 int hist_ent;
7613 int hist_lim;
7615 hist_ent = (ultra_cur_hist - 1) & (ULTRA_NUM_HIST - 1);
7616 if (ultra_cycles_elapsed < 4)
7617 hist_lim = ultra_cycles_elapsed;
7618 else
7619 hist_lim = 4;
7620 while (hist_lim > 0)
7622 struct ultrasparc_pipeline_state *up = &ultra_pipe_hist[hist_ent];
7623 int slot = 4;
7625 while (--slot >= 0)
7627 rtx insn = up->group[slot];
7628 enum machine_mode this_mode;
7629 rtx pat;
7631 if (! insn
7632 || GET_CODE (insn) != INSN
7633 || (pat = PATTERN (insn)) == 0
7634 || GET_CODE (pat) != SET)
7635 continue;
7637 this_mode = GET_MODE (SET_DEST (pat));
7638 if ((this_mode != SFmode
7639 && this_mode != DFmode)
7640 || this_mode == fpmode)
7641 continue;
7643 /* If it is not FMOV, FABS, FNEG, FDIV, or FSQRT then
7644 we will get a stall. Loads and stores are independent
7645 of these rules. */
7646 if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat)) != ABS
7647 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat)) != NEG
7648 && ((TMASK (get_attr_type (insn)) &
7649 (TMASK (TYPE_FPDIVS) | TMASK (TYPE_FPDIVD) |
7650 TMASK (TYPE_FPMOVE) | TMASK (TYPE_FPSQRTS) |
7651 TMASK (TYPE_FPSQRTD) |
7652 TMASK (TYPE_LOAD) | TMASK (TYPE_STORE))) == 0))
7653 return 1;
7655 hist_lim--;
7656 hist_ent = (hist_ent - 1) & (ULTRA_NUM_HIST - 1);
7659 /* No conflicts, safe to dispatch. */
7660 return 0;
7663 /* Find an instruction in LIST which has one of the
7664 type attributes enumerated in TYPE_MASK. START
7665 says where to begin the search.
7667 NOTE: This scheme depends upon the fact that we
7668 have less than 32 distinct type attributes. */
7670 static int ultra_types_avail;
7672 static rtx *
7673 ultra_find_type (type_mask, list, start)
7674 int type_mask;
7675 rtx *list;
7676 int start;
7678 int i;
7680 /* Short circuit if no such insn exists in the ready
7681 at the moment. */
7682 if ((type_mask & ultra_types_avail) == 0)
7683 return 0;
7685 for (i = start; i >= 0; i--)
7687 rtx insn = list[i];
7689 if (recog_memoized (insn) >= 0
7690 && (TMASK(get_attr_type (insn)) & type_mask))
7692 enum machine_mode fpmode = SFmode;
7693 rtx pat = 0;
7694 int slot;
7695 int check_depend = 0;
7696 int check_fpmode_conflict = 0;
7698 if (GET_CODE (insn) == INSN
7699 && (pat = PATTERN(insn)) != 0
7700 && GET_CODE (pat) == SET
7701 && !(type_mask & (TMASK (TYPE_STORE) |
7702 TMASK (TYPE_FPSTORE))))
7704 check_depend = 1;
7705 if (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (pat)) == SFmode
7706 || GET_MODE (SET_DEST (pat)) == DFmode)
7708 fpmode = GET_MODE (SET_DEST (pat));
7709 check_fpmode_conflict = 1;
7713 slot = 4;
7714 while(--slot >= 0)
7716 rtx slot_insn = ultra_pipe.group[slot];
7717 rtx slot_pat;
7719 /* Already issued, bad dependency, or FPU
7720 mode conflict. */
7721 if (slot_insn != 0
7722 && (slot_pat = PATTERN (slot_insn)) != 0
7723 && ((insn == slot_insn)
7724 || (check_depend == 1
7725 && GET_CODE (slot_insn) == INSN
7726 && GET_CODE (slot_pat) == SET
7727 && ((GET_CODE (SET_DEST (slot_pat)) == REG
7728 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat)) == REG
7729 && REGNO (SET_DEST (slot_pat)) ==
7730 REGNO (SET_SRC (pat)))
7731 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (slot_pat)) == SUBREG
7732 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat)) == SUBREG
7733 && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (slot_pat))) ==
7734 REGNO (SUBREG_REG (SET_SRC (pat)))
7735 && SUBREG_BYTE (SET_DEST (slot_pat)) ==
7736 SUBREG_BYTE (SET_SRC (pat)))))
7737 || (check_fpmode_conflict == 1
7738 && GET_CODE (slot_insn) == INSN
7739 && GET_CODE (slot_pat) == SET
7740 && (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (slot_pat)) == SFmode
7741 || GET_MODE (SET_DEST (slot_pat)) == DFmode)
7742 && GET_MODE (SET_DEST (slot_pat)) != fpmode)))
7743 goto next;
7746 /* Check for peculiar result availability and dispatch
7747 interference situations. */
7748 if (pat != 0
7749 && ultra_cycles_elapsed > 0)
7751 rtx link;
7753 for (link = LOG_LINKS (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
7755 rtx link_insn = XEXP (link, 0);
7756 if (GET_CODE (link_insn) == INSN
7757 && recog_memoized (link_insn) >= 0
7758 && (TMASK (get_attr_type (link_insn)) &
7759 (TMASK (TYPE_CMOVE) | TMASK (TYPE_FPCMOVE)))
7760 && ! ultra_cmove_results_ready_p (link_insn))
7761 goto next;
7764 if (check_fpmode_conflict
7765 && ultra_fpmode_conflict_exists (fpmode))
7766 goto next;
7769 return &list[i];
7771 next:
7774 return 0;
7777 static void
7778 ultra_build_types_avail (ready, n_ready)
7779 rtx *ready;
7780 int n_ready;
7782 int i = n_ready - 1;
7784 ultra_types_avail = 0;
7785 while(i >= 0)
7787 rtx insn = ready[i];
7789 if (recog_memoized (insn) >= 0)
7790 ultra_types_avail |= TMASK (get_attr_type (insn));
7792 i -= 1;
7796 /* Place insn pointed to my IP into the pipeline.
7797 Make element THIS of READY be that insn if it
7798 is not already. TYPE indicates the pipeline class
7799 this insn falls into. */
7800 static void
7801 ultra_schedule_insn (ip, ready, this, type)
7802 rtx *ip;
7803 rtx *ready;
7804 int this;
7805 enum ultra_code type;
7807 int pipe_slot;
7808 char mask = ultra_pipe.free_slot_mask;
7809 rtx temp;
7811 /* Obtain free slot. */
7812 for (pipe_slot = 0; pipe_slot < 4; pipe_slot++)
7813 if ((mask & (1 << pipe_slot)) != 0)
7814 break;
7815 if (pipe_slot == 4)
7816 abort ();
7818 /* In it goes, and it hasn't been committed yet. */
7819 ultra_pipe.group[pipe_slot] = *ip;
7820 ultra_pipe.codes[pipe_slot] = type;
7821 ultra_pipe.contents[type] = 1;
7822 if (UMASK (type) &
7823 (UMASK (IEUN) | UMASK (IEU0) | UMASK (IEU1)))
7824 ultra_pipe.num_ieu_insns += 1;
7826 ultra_pipe.free_slot_mask = (mask & ~(1 << pipe_slot));
7827 ultra_pipe.group_size += 1;
7828 ultra_pipe.commit[pipe_slot] = 0;
7830 /* Update ready list. */
7831 temp = *ip;
7832 while (ip != &ready[this])
7834 ip[0] = ip[1];
7835 ++ip;
7837 *ip = temp;
7840 /* Advance to the next pipeline group. */
7841 static void
7842 ultra_flush_pipeline ()
7844 ultra_cur_hist = (ultra_cur_hist + 1) & (ULTRA_NUM_HIST - 1);
7845 ultra_cycles_elapsed += 1;
7846 memset ((char *) &ultra_pipe, 0, sizeof ultra_pipe);
7847 ultra_pipe.free_slot_mask = 0xf;
7850 /* Init our data structures for this current block. */
7851 static void
7852 ultrasparc_sched_init ()
7854 memset ((char *) ultra_pipe_hist, 0, sizeof ultra_pipe_hist);
7855 ultra_cur_hist = 0;
7856 ultra_cycles_elapsed = 0;
7857 ultra_pipe.free_slot_mask = 0xf;
7860 static void
7861 sparc_sched_init (dump, sched_verbose, max_ready)
7862 FILE *dump ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7863 int sched_verbose ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7864 int max_ready ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7866 if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC)
7867 ultrasparc_sched_init ();
7870 /* INSN has been scheduled, update pipeline commit state
7871 and return how many instructions are still to be
7872 scheduled in this group. */
7873 static int
7874 ultrasparc_variable_issue (insn)
7875 rtx insn;
7877 struct ultrasparc_pipeline_state *up = &ultra_pipe;
7878 int i, left_to_fire;
7880 left_to_fire = 0;
7881 for (i = 0; i < 4; i++)
7883 if (up->group[i] == 0)
7884 continue;
7886 if (up->group[i] == insn)
7888 up->commit[i] = 1;
7890 else if (! up->commit[i])
7891 left_to_fire++;
7894 return left_to_fire;
7897 static int
7898 sparc_variable_issue (dump, sched_verbose, insn, cim)
7899 FILE *dump ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7900 int sched_verbose ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7901 rtx insn;
7902 int cim;
7904 if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC)
7905 return ultrasparc_variable_issue (insn);
7906 else
7907 return cim - 1;
7910 /* In actual_hazard_this_instance, we may have yanked some
7911 instructions from the ready list due to conflict cost
7912 adjustments. If so, and such an insn was in our pipeline
7913 group, remove it and update state. */
7914 static void
7915 ultra_rescan_pipeline_state (ready, n_ready)
7916 rtx *ready;
7917 int n_ready;
7919 struct ultrasparc_pipeline_state *up = &ultra_pipe;
7920 int i;
7922 for (i = 0; i < 4; i++)
7924 rtx insn = up->group[i];
7925 int j;
7927 if (! insn)
7928 continue;
7930 /* If it has been committed, then it was removed from
7931 the ready list because it was actually scheduled,
7932 and that is not the case we are searching for here. */
7933 if (up->commit[i] != 0)
7934 continue;
7936 for (j = n_ready - 1; j >= 0; j--)
7937 if (ready[j] == insn)
7938 break;
7940 /* If we didn't find it, toss it. */
7941 if (j < 0)
7943 enum ultra_code ucode = up->codes[i];
7945 up->group[i] = 0;
7946 up->codes[i] = NONE;
7947 up->contents[ucode] = 0;
7948 if (UMASK (ucode) &
7949 (UMASK (IEUN) | UMASK (IEU0) | UMASK (IEU1)))
7950 up->num_ieu_insns -= 1;
7952 up->free_slot_mask |= (1 << i);
7953 up->group_size -= 1;
7954 up->commit[i] = 0;
7959 static void
7960 ultrasparc_sched_reorder (dump, sched_verbose, ready, n_ready)
7961 FILE *dump;
7962 int sched_verbose;
7963 rtx *ready;
7964 int n_ready;
7966 struct ultrasparc_pipeline_state *up = &ultra_pipe;
7967 int i, this_insn;
7969 if (sched_verbose)
7971 int n;
7973 fprintf (dump, "\n;;\tUltraSPARC Looking at [");
7974 for (n = n_ready - 1; n >= 0; n--)
7976 rtx insn = ready[n];
7977 enum ultra_code ucode;
7979 if (recog_memoized (insn) < 0)
7980 continue;
7981 ucode = ultra_code_from_mask (TMASK (get_attr_type (insn)));
7982 if (n != 0)
7983 fprintf (dump, "%s(%d) ",
7984 ultra_code_names[ucode],
7985 INSN_UID (insn));
7986 else
7987 fprintf (dump, "%s(%d)",
7988 ultra_code_names[ucode],
7989 INSN_UID (insn));
7991 fprintf (dump, "]\n");
7994 this_insn = n_ready - 1;
7996 /* Skip over junk we don't understand. */
7997 while ((this_insn >= 0)
7998 && recog_memoized (ready[this_insn]) < 0)
7999 this_insn--;
8001 ultra_build_types_avail (ready, this_insn + 1);
8003 while (this_insn >= 0) {
8004 int old_group_size = up->group_size;
8006 if (up->group_size != 0)
8008 int num_committed;
8010 num_committed = (up->commit[0] + up->commit[1] +
8011 up->commit[2] + up->commit[3]);
8012 /* If nothing has been commited from our group, or all of
8013 them have. Clear out the (current cycle's) pipeline
8014 state and start afresh. */
8015 if (num_committed == 0
8016 || num_committed == up->group_size)
8018 ultra_flush_pipeline ();
8019 up = &ultra_pipe;
8020 old_group_size = 0;
8022 else
8024 /* OK, some ready list insns got requeued and thus removed
8025 from the ready list. Account for this fact. */
8026 ultra_rescan_pipeline_state (ready, n_ready);
8028 /* Something "changed", make this look like a newly
8029 formed group so the code at the end of the loop
8030 knows that progress was in fact made. */
8031 if (up->group_size != old_group_size)
8032 old_group_size = 0;
8036 if (up->group_size == 0)
8038 /* If the pipeline is (still) empty and we have any single
8039 group insns, get them out now as this is a good time. */
8040 rtx *ip = ultra_find_type ((TMASK (TYPE_RETURN) | TMASK (TYPE_IDIV) |
8041 TMASK (TYPE_IMUL) | TMASK (TYPE_CMOVE) |
8042 TMASK (TYPE_MULTI) | TMASK (TYPE_MISC)),
8043 ready, this_insn);
8044 if (ip)
8046 ultra_schedule_insn (ip, ready, this_insn, SINGLE);
8047 break;
8050 /* If we are not in the process of emptying out the pipe, try to
8051 obtain an instruction which must be the first in it's group. */
8052 ip = ultra_find_type ((TMASK (TYPE_CALL) |
8053 TMASK (TYPE_SIBCALL) |
8054 TMASK (TYPE_CALL_NO_DELAY_SLOT) |
8055 TMASK (TYPE_UNCOND_BRANCH)),
8056 ready, this_insn);
8057 if (ip)
8059 ultra_schedule_insn (ip, ready, this_insn, IEU1);
8060 this_insn--;
8062 else if ((ip = ultra_find_type ((TMASK (TYPE_FPDIVS) |
8063 TMASK (TYPE_FPDIVD) |
8064 TMASK (TYPE_FPSQRTS) |
8065 TMASK (TYPE_FPSQRTD)),
8066 ready, this_insn)) != 0)
8068 ultra_schedule_insn (ip, ready, this_insn, FPM);
8069 this_insn--;
8073 /* Try to fill the integer pipeline. First, look for an IEU0 specific
8074 operation. We can't do more IEU operations if the first 3 slots are
8075 all full or we have dispatched two IEU insns already. */
8076 if ((up->free_slot_mask & 0x7) != 0
8077 && up->num_ieu_insns < 2
8078 && up->contents[IEU0] == 0
8079 && up->contents[IEUN] == 0)
8081 rtx *ip = ultra_find_type (TMASK(TYPE_SHIFT), ready, this_insn);
8082 if (ip)
8084 ultra_schedule_insn (ip, ready, this_insn, IEU0);
8085 this_insn--;
8089 /* If we can, try to find an IEU1 specific or an unnamed
8090 IEU instruction. */
8091 if ((up->free_slot_mask & 0x7) != 0
8092 && up->num_ieu_insns < 2)
8094 rtx *ip = ultra_find_type ((TMASK (TYPE_IALU) |
8095 (up->contents[IEU1] == 0 ? TMASK (TYPE_COMPARE) : 0)),
8096 ready, this_insn);
8097 if (ip)
8099 rtx insn = *ip;
8101 ultra_schedule_insn (ip, ready, this_insn,
8102 (!up->contents[IEU1]
8103 && get_attr_type (insn) == TYPE_COMPARE)
8104 ? IEU1 : IEUN);
8105 this_insn--;
8109 /* If only one IEU insn has been found, try to find another unnamed
8110 IEU operation or an IEU1 specific one. */
8111 if ((up->free_slot_mask & 0x7) != 0
8112 && up->num_ieu_insns < 2)
8114 rtx *ip;
8115 int tmask = TMASK (TYPE_IALU);
8117 if (!up->contents[IEU1])
8118 tmask |= TMASK (TYPE_COMPARE);
8119 ip = ultra_find_type (tmask, ready, this_insn);
8120 if (ip)
8122 rtx insn = *ip;
8124 ultra_schedule_insn (ip, ready, this_insn,
8125 (!up->contents[IEU1]
8126 && get_attr_type (insn) == TYPE_COMPARE)
8127 ? IEU1 : IEUN);
8128 this_insn--;
8132 /* Try for a load or store, but such an insn can only be issued
8133 if it is within' one of the first 3 slots. */
8134 if ((up->free_slot_mask & 0x7) != 0
8135 && up->contents[LSU] == 0)
8137 rtx *ip = ultra_find_type ((TMASK (TYPE_LOAD) | TMASK (TYPE_SLOAD) |
8138 TMASK (TYPE_STORE) | TMASK (TYPE_FPLOAD) |
8139 TMASK (TYPE_FPSTORE)), ready, this_insn);
8140 if (ip)
8142 ultra_schedule_insn (ip, ready, this_insn, LSU);
8143 this_insn--;
8147 /* Now find FPU operations, first FPM class. But not divisions or
8148 square-roots because those will break the group up. Unlike all
8149 the previous types, these can go in any slot. */
8150 if (up->free_slot_mask != 0
8151 && up->contents[FPM] == 0)
8153 rtx *ip = ultra_find_type (TMASK (TYPE_FPMUL), ready, this_insn);
8154 if (ip)
8156 ultra_schedule_insn (ip, ready, this_insn, FPM);
8157 this_insn--;
8161 /* Continue on with FPA class if we have not filled the group already. */
8162 if (up->free_slot_mask != 0
8163 && up->contents[FPA] == 0)
8165 rtx *ip = ultra_find_type ((TMASK (TYPE_FPMOVE) | TMASK (TYPE_FPCMOVE) |
8166 TMASK (TYPE_FP) | TMASK (TYPE_FPCMP)),
8167 ready, this_insn);
8168 if (ip)
8170 ultra_schedule_insn (ip, ready, this_insn, FPA);
8171 this_insn--;
8175 /* Finally, maybe stick a branch in here. */
8176 if (up->free_slot_mask != 0
8177 && up->contents[CTI] == 0)
8179 rtx *ip = ultra_find_type (TMASK (TYPE_BRANCH), ready, this_insn);
8181 /* Try to slip in a branch only if it is one of the
8182 next 2 in the ready list. */
8183 if (ip && ((&ready[this_insn] - ip) < 2))
8185 ultra_schedule_insn (ip, ready, this_insn, CTI);
8186 this_insn--;
8190 up->group_size = 0;
8191 for (i = 0; i < 4; i++)
8192 if ((up->free_slot_mask & (1 << i)) == 0)
8193 up->group_size++;
8195 /* See if we made any progress... */
8196 if (old_group_size != up->group_size)
8197 break;
8199 /* Clean out the (current cycle's) pipeline state
8200 and try once more. If we placed no instructions
8201 into the pipeline at all, it means a real hard
8202 conflict exists with some earlier issued instruction
8203 so we must advance to the next cycle to clear it up. */
8204 if (up->group_size == 0)
8206 ultra_flush_pipeline ();
8207 up = &ultra_pipe;
8209 else
8211 memset ((char *) &ultra_pipe, 0, sizeof ultra_pipe);
8212 ultra_pipe.free_slot_mask = 0xf;
8216 if (sched_verbose)
8218 int n, gsize;
8220 fprintf (dump, ";;\tUltraSPARC Launched [");
8221 gsize = up->group_size;
8222 for (n = 0; n < 4; n++)
8224 rtx insn = up->group[n];
8226 if (! insn)
8227 continue;
8229 gsize -= 1;
8230 if (gsize != 0)
8231 fprintf (dump, "%s(%d) ",
8232 ultra_code_names[up->codes[n]],
8233 INSN_UID (insn));
8234 else
8235 fprintf (dump, "%s(%d)",
8236 ultra_code_names[up->codes[n]],
8237 INSN_UID (insn));
8239 fprintf (dump, "]\n");
8243 static int
8244 sparc_sched_reorder (dump, sched_verbose, ready, n_readyp, clock)
8245 FILE *dump;
8246 int sched_verbose;
8247 rtx *ready;
8248 int *n_readyp;
8249 int clock ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
8251 if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC)
8252 ultrasparc_sched_reorder (dump, sched_verbose, ready, *n_readyp);
8253 return sparc_issue_rate ();
8256 static int
8257 sparc_issue_rate ()
8259 switch (sparc_cpu)
8261 default:
8262 return 1;
8263 case PROCESSOR_V9:
8264 /* Assume V9 processors are capable of at least dual-issue. */
8265 return 2;
8266 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
8267 return 3;
8268 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
8269 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
8270 return 2;
8271 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
8272 return 4;
8276 static int
8277 set_extends (insn)
8278 rtx insn;
8280 register rtx pat = PATTERN (insn);
8282 switch (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat)))
8284 /* Load and some shift instructions zero extend. */
8285 case MEM:
8286 case ZERO_EXTEND:
8287 /* sethi clears the high bits */
8288 case HIGH:
8289 /* LO_SUM is used with sethi. sethi cleared the high
8290 bits and the values used with lo_sum are positive */
8291 case LO_SUM:
8292 /* Store flag stores 0 or 1 */
8293 case LT: case LTU:
8294 case GT: case GTU:
8295 case LE: case LEU:
8296 case GE: case GEU:
8297 case EQ:
8298 case NE:
8299 return 1;
8300 case AND:
8302 rtx op0 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 0);
8303 rtx op1 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 1);
8304 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
8305 return INTVAL (op1) >= 0;
8306 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG)
8307 return 0;
8308 if (sparc_check_64 (op0, insn) == 1)
8309 return 1;
8310 return (GET_CODE (op1) == REG && sparc_check_64 (op1, insn) == 1);
8312 case IOR:
8313 case XOR:
8315 rtx op0 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 0);
8316 rtx op1 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 1);
8317 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG || sparc_check_64 (op0, insn) <= 0)
8318 return 0;
8319 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
8320 return INTVAL (op1) >= 0;
8321 return (GET_CODE (op1) == REG && sparc_check_64 (op1, insn) == 1);
8323 case ASHIFT:
8324 case LSHIFTRT:
8325 return GET_MODE (SET_SRC (pat)) == SImode;
8326 /* Positive integers leave the high bits zero. */
8327 case CONST_DOUBLE:
8328 return ! (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (SET_SRC (pat)) & 0x80000000);
8329 case CONST_INT:
8330 return ! (INTVAL (SET_SRC (pat)) & 0x80000000);
8331 case ASHIFTRT:
8332 case SIGN_EXTEND:
8333 return - (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (pat)) == SImode);
8334 case REG:
8335 return sparc_check_64 (SET_SRC (pat), insn);
8336 default:
8337 return 0;
8341 /* We _ought_ to have only one kind per function, but... */
8342 static rtx sparc_addr_diff_list;
8343 static rtx sparc_addr_list;
8345 void
8346 sparc_defer_case_vector (lab, vec, diff)
8347 rtx lab, vec;
8348 int diff;
8350 vec = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, lab, vec);
8351 if (diff)
8352 sparc_addr_diff_list
8353 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, vec, sparc_addr_diff_list);
8354 else
8355 sparc_addr_list = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, vec, sparc_addr_list);
8358 static void
8359 sparc_output_addr_vec (vec)
8360 rtx vec;
8362 rtx lab = XEXP (vec, 0), body = XEXP (vec, 1);
8363 int idx, vlen = XVECLEN (body, 0);
8365 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START
8366 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START (asm_out_file);
8367 #endif
8369 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL
8370 ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab),
8371 NEXT_INSN (lab));
8372 #else
8373 ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab));
8374 #endif
8376 for (idx = 0; idx < vlen; idx++)
8378 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT
8379 (asm_out_file, CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (XEXP (XVECEXP (body, 0, idx), 0)));
8382 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END
8383 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END (asm_out_file);
8384 #endif
8387 static void
8388 sparc_output_addr_diff_vec (vec)
8389 rtx vec;
8391 rtx lab = XEXP (vec, 0), body = XEXP (vec, 1);
8392 rtx base = XEXP (XEXP (body, 0), 0);
8393 int idx, vlen = XVECLEN (body, 1);
8395 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START
8396 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START (asm_out_file);
8397 #endif
8399 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL
8400 ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab),
8401 NEXT_INSN (lab));
8402 #else
8403 ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab));
8404 #endif
8406 for (idx = 0; idx < vlen; idx++)
8408 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT
8409 (asm_out_file,
8410 body,
8411 CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (XEXP (XVECEXP (body, 1, idx), 0)),
8412 CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (base));
8415 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END
8416 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END (asm_out_file);
8417 #endif
8420 static void
8421 sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors ()
8423 rtx t;
8424 int align;
8426 if (sparc_addr_list == NULL_RTX
8427 && sparc_addr_diff_list == NULL_RTX)
8428 return;
8430 /* Align to cache line in the function's code section. */
8431 function_section (current_function_decl);
8433 align = floor_log2 (FUNCTION_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT);
8434 if (align > 0)
8435 ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (asm_out_file, align);
8437 for (t = sparc_addr_list; t ; t = XEXP (t, 1))
8438 sparc_output_addr_vec (XEXP (t, 0));
8439 for (t = sparc_addr_diff_list; t ; t = XEXP (t, 1))
8440 sparc_output_addr_diff_vec (XEXP (t, 0));
8442 sparc_addr_list = sparc_addr_diff_list = NULL_RTX;
8445 /* Return 0 if the high 32 bits of X (the low word of X, if DImode) are
8446 unknown. Return 1 if the high bits are zero, -1 if the register is
8447 sign extended. */
8449 sparc_check_64 (x, insn)
8450 rtx x, insn;
8452 /* If a register is set only once it is safe to ignore insns this
8453 code does not know how to handle. The loop will either recognize
8454 the single set and return the correct value or fail to recognize
8455 it and return 0. */
8456 int set_once = 0;
8457 rtx y = x;
8459 if (GET_CODE (x) != REG)
8460 abort ();
8462 if (GET_MODE (x) == DImode)
8463 y = gen_rtx_REG (SImode, REGNO (x) + WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN);
8465 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
8466 && REG_N_SETS (REGNO (y)) == 1)
8467 set_once = 1;
8469 if (insn == 0)
8471 if (set_once)
8472 insn = get_last_insn_anywhere ();
8473 else
8474 return 0;
8477 while ((insn = PREV_INSN (insn)))
8479 switch (GET_CODE (insn))
8481 case JUMP_INSN:
8482 case NOTE:
8483 break;
8484 case CODE_LABEL:
8485 case CALL_INSN:
8486 default:
8487 if (! set_once)
8488 return 0;
8489 break;
8490 case INSN:
8492 rtx pat = PATTERN (insn);
8493 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET)
8494 return 0;
8495 if (rtx_equal_p (x, SET_DEST (pat)))
8496 return set_extends (insn);
8497 if (y && rtx_equal_p (y, SET_DEST (pat)))
8498 return set_extends (insn);
8499 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_DEST (pat), y))
8500 return 0;
8504 return 0;
8507 char *
8508 sparc_v8plus_shift (operands, insn, opcode)
8509 rtx *operands;
8510 rtx insn;
8511 const char *opcode;
8513 static char asm_code[60];
8515 if (GET_CODE (operands[3]) == SCRATCH)
8516 operands[3] = operands[0];
8517 if (GET_CODE (operands[1]) == CONST_INT)
8519 output_asm_insn ("mov\t%1, %3", operands);
8521 else
8523 output_asm_insn ("sllx\t%H1, 32, %3", operands);
8524 if (sparc_check_64 (operands[1], insn) <= 0)
8525 output_asm_insn ("srl\t%L1, 0, %L1", operands);
8526 output_asm_insn ("or\t%L1, %3, %3", operands);
8529 strcpy(asm_code, opcode);
8530 if (which_alternative != 2)
8531 return strcat (asm_code, "\t%0, %2, %L0\n\tsrlx\t%L0, 32, %H0");
8532 else
8533 return strcat (asm_code, "\t%3, %2, %3\n\tsrlx\t%3, 32, %H0\n\tmov\t%3, %L0");
8536 /* Output rtl to increment the profiler label LABELNO
8537 for profiling a function entry. */
8539 void
8540 sparc_profile_hook (labelno)
8541 int labelno;
8543 char buf[32];
8544 rtx lab, fun;
8546 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (buf, "LP", labelno);
8547 lab = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, ggc_strdup (buf));
8548 fun = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, MCOUNT_FUNCTION);
8550 emit_library_call (fun, 0, VOIDmode, 1, lab, Pmode);
8553 /* Mark ARG, which is really a struct ultrasparc_pipline_state *, for
8554 GC. */
8556 static void
8557 mark_ultrasparc_pipeline_state (arg)
8558 void *arg;
8560 struct ultrasparc_pipeline_state *ups;
8561 size_t i;
8563 ups = (struct ultrasparc_pipeline_state *) arg;
8564 for (i = 0; i < ARRAY_SIZE (ups->group); ++i)
8565 ggc_mark_rtx (ups->group[i]);
8568 /* Called to register all of our global variables with the garbage
8569 collector. */
8571 static void
8572 sparc_add_gc_roots ()
8574 ggc_add_rtx_root (&sparc_compare_op0, 1);
8575 ggc_add_rtx_root (&sparc_compare_op1, 1);
8576 ggc_add_rtx_root (&global_offset_table, 1);
8577 ggc_add_rtx_root (&get_pc_symbol, 1);
8578 ggc_add_rtx_root (&sparc_addr_diff_list, 1);
8579 ggc_add_rtx_root (&sparc_addr_list, 1);
8580 ggc_add_root (ultra_pipe_hist, ARRAY_SIZE (ultra_pipe_hist),
8581 sizeof (ultra_pipe_hist[0]), &mark_ultrasparc_pipeline_state);
8584 #ifdef OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF
8585 static void
8586 sparc_elf_asm_named_section (name, flags)
8587 const char *name;
8588 unsigned int flags;
8590 if (flags & SECTION_MERGE)
8592 /* entsize cannot be expressed in this section attributes
8593 encoding style. */
8594 default_elf_asm_named_section (name, flags);
8595 return;
8598 fprintf (asm_out_file, "\t.section\t\"%s\"", name);
8600 if (!(flags & SECTION_DEBUG))
8601 fputs (",#alloc", asm_out_file);
8602 if (flags & SECTION_WRITE)
8603 fputs (",#write", asm_out_file);
8604 if (flags & SECTION_CODE)
8605 fputs (",#execinstr", asm_out_file);
8607 /* ??? Handle SECTION_BSS. */
8609 fputc ('\n', asm_out_file);
8611 #endif /* OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF */
8614 sparc_extra_constraint_check (op, c, strict)
8615 rtx op;
8616 char c;
8617 int strict;
8619 int reload_ok_mem;
8621 if (TARGET_ARCH64
8622 && (c == 'T' || c == 'U'))
8623 return 0;
8625 switch (c)
8627 case 'Q':
8628 return fp_sethi_p (op);
8630 case 'R':
8631 return fp_mov_p (op);
8633 case 'S':
8634 return fp_high_losum_p (op);
8636 case 'U':
8637 if (! strict
8638 || (GET_CODE (op) == REG
8639 && (REGNO (op) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
8640 || reg_renumber[REGNO (op)] >= 0)))
8641 return register_ok_for_ldd (op);
8643 return 0;
8645 case 'W':
8646 case 'T':
8647 break;
8649 default:
8650 return 0;
8653 /* Our memory extra constraints have to emulate the
8654 behavior of 'm' and 'o' in order for reload to work
8655 correctly. */
8656 if (GET_CODE (op) == MEM)
8658 reload_ok_mem = 0;
8659 if ((TARGET_ARCH64 || mem_min_alignment (op, 8))
8660 && (! strict
8661 || strict_memory_address_p (Pmode, XEXP (op, 0))))
8662 reload_ok_mem = 1;
8664 else
8666 reload_ok_mem = (reload_in_progress
8667 && GET_CODE (op) == REG
8668 && REGNO (op) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
8669 && reg_renumber [REGNO (op)] < 0);
8672 return reload_ok_mem;